HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP User Guide

HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP User Guide

HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP

User Guide

HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP

User Guide

Copyright information

© 2007 Copyright Hewlett-Packard

Development Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Part number: CC395-90926

Copyright 2007 edition: 1, 11/2007

Trademark credits

Microsoft ® and Windows ® are

U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

PostScript

®

is a registered trademark of

Adobe Systems Incorporated.

ENERGY STAR ® and the ENERGY STAR logo ® are U.S. registered marks of the

United States Environmental Protection

Agency.

Table of contents

1 Product Basics

Product introduction ............................................................................................................................... 2

Product features .................................................................................................................................... 3

Product walkaround ............................................................................................................................... 7

Output devices ....................................................................................................................................... 8

3,000-sheet stacker .............................................................................................................. 8

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker .................................................................................................. 8

Paper handling features ....................................................................................... 8

Stapling information ............................................................................................. 8

Multifunction finisher ............................................................................................................. 8

Paper handling features ....................................................................................... 8

Stapling information ............................................................................................. 9

Booklets ................................................................................................................ 9

8-bin mailbox ....................................................................................................................... 10

2 Control panel

Use the control panel ........................................................................................................................... 12

Control-panel layout ............................................................................................................ 12

Home screen ....................................................................................................................... 13

Buttons on the touchscreen ................................................................................................ 14

Control-panel help system .................................................................................................. 14

Use the Administration menu .............................................................................................................. 15

Navigate the Administration menu ...................................................................................... 15

Information menu ................................................................................................................ 16

Default Job Options menu .................................................................................................. 17

Default Options for Originals .............................................................................. 18

Default Copy Options ......................................................................................... 19

Default Fax Options ........................................................................................... 20

Default E-mail Options ....................................................................................... 21

Default Send to Folder Options .......................................................................... 22

Default Print Options .......................................................................................... 23

Time/Scheduling menu ....................................................................................................... 24

Management menu ............................................................................................................. 26

Initial Setup menu ............................................................................................................... 27

Networking and I/O ............................................................................................ 27

Fax Setup ........................................................................................................... 35

E-mail Setup ....................................................................................................... 38

Send Setup menu .............................................................................................. 38

Device Behavior menu ........................................................................................................ 39

ENWW iii

Print Quality menu .............................................................................................................. 43

Troubleshooting menu ........................................................................................................ 45

Resets menu ....................................................................................................................... 47

Service menu ...................................................................................................................... 47

3 Software for Windows

Supported operating systems for Windows ......................................................................................... 50

Supported printer drivers for Windows ................................................................................................ 51

HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) ......................................................................................................... 52

UPD installation modes ...................................................................................................... 52

Select the correct printer driver for Windows ...................................................................................... 53

Priority for print settings ....................................................................................................................... 54

Change printer-driver settings for Windows ........................................................................................ 55

Install the Windows software ............................................................................................................... 56

Install Windows software for direct connections ................................................................. 56

Install Windows software for networks ............................................................................... 56

Remove software for Windows ........................................................................................... 57

Supported utilities ................................................................................................................................ 58

HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................................................................... 58

Embedded Web server ....................................................................................................... 58

HP Easy Printer Care .......................................................................................................... 58

Software for other operating systems .................................................................................................. 60

4 Use the product with Macintosh

Software for Macintosh ........................................................................................................................ 62

Supported operating systems for Macintosh ...................................................................... 62

Supported printer drivers for Macintosh ............................................................................. 62

Software installation types for Macintosh ........................................................................... 62

Install Macintosh software for direct connections (USB) ................................... 62

Install Macintosh software for networks ............................................................. 63

Software for Macintosh computers ..................................................................................... 64

HP Printer Utility ................................................................................................. 64

Open the HP Printer Utility ................................................................ 65

HP Printer Utility features .................................................................. 65

Priority for print settings for Macintosh ............................................................................... 66

Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh ...................................................................... 66

Remove software from Macintosh operating systems ........................................................ 67

Supported utilities for Macintosh ......................................................................................... 67

Embedded Web server ...................................................................................... 67

Use features in the Macintosh printer driver ....................................................................................... 68

Create and use printing presets in Macintosh .................................................................... 68

Resize documents or print on a custom paper size ........................................................... 68

Print a cover page ............................................................................................................... 68

Use watermarks .................................................................................................................. 69

Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh ................................................... 69

Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing) ................................................................ 70

Set the stapling options ...................................................................................................... 70

Store jobs ............................................................................................................................ 71

Use the Services menu ....................................................................................................... 71

iv ENWW

5 Connectivity

USB connection ................................................................................................................................... 74

Auxiliary connection ............................................................................................................................. 75

Network configuration .......................................................................................................................... 76

Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters ......................................................................................... 76

Change the IP address ...................................................................................... 76

Set the subnet mask .......................................................................................... 77

Set the default gateway ...................................................................................... 77

Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters ......................................................................................... 78

Disable network protocols (optional) .................................................................................. 78

Disable IPX/SPX ................................................................................................ 78

Disable AppleTalk .............................................................................................. 79

Disable DLC/LLC ............................................................................................... 79

HP Jetdirect EIO print servers ............................................................................................ 79

6 Paper and print media

Understand paper and print media use ............................................................................................... 82

Supported paper and print media sizes ............................................................................................... 83

Custom paper sizes ............................................................................................................................. 85

Special paper or print media guidelines .............................................................................................. 86

Load paper and print media ................................................................................................................. 87

Load tray 1 .......................................................................................................................... 87

Load trays 2, 3, and 4 ......................................................................................................... 88

Configure trays .................................................................................................................................... 94

Configure a tray when loading media ................................................................................. 94

Configure a tray by using the Supplies Status button on the touchscreen ........................ 94

Select the media by source, type, or size ........................................................................... 94

Source ................................................................................................................ 95

Type and Size .................................................................................................... 95

Select the output bin ............................................................................................................................ 96

Select an output location .................................................................................................... 97

Printing ............................................................................................................... 97

Copying .............................................................................................................. 97

7 Print tasks

Media type and tray loading .............................................................................................................. 100

Use features in the Windows printer driver ....................................................................................... 102

Open the printer driver ...................................................................................................... 102

Use printing shortcuts ....................................................................................................... 102

Set paper and quality options ........................................................................................... 102

Set document effects ........................................................................................................ 103

Set document finishing options ......................................................................................... 103

Set product output options ................................................................................................ 104

Set job storage options ..................................................................................................... 104

Obtain support and product-status information ................................................................ 105

Set advanced printing options .......................................................................................... 105

Staple documents .............................................................................................................................. 107

Set the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs .......................................................... 107

Set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs ......................................................... 107

Set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job ................................................. 107

ENWW v

Configure the device to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty .................. 108

Load staples ...................................................................................................................... 108

Cancel a print job ............................................................................................................................... 112

Stop the current print job from the control panel .............................................................. 112

Stop the current print job from the software program ....................................................... 112

Print on envelopes ............................................................................................................................. 113

Job storage features for print ............................................................................................................ 116

Gain access to the job storage features for print .............................................................. 116

Use the proof and hold feature ......................................................................................... 116

Create a proof and hold job ............................................................................. 116

Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job .......................................... 117

Delete a proof and hold job .............................................................................. 117

Use the personal job feature ............................................................................................. 117

Create a personal job ....................................................................................... 117

Print a personal job .......................................................................................... 117

Delete a personal job ....................................................................................... 118

Use the QuickCopy feature ............................................................................................... 118

Create a QuickCopy job ................................................................................... 118

Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job ...................................................... 119

Delete a QuickCopy job ................................................................................... 119

Use the stored job feature ................................................................................................ 119

Create a stored print job .................................................................................. 119

Print a stored print job ...................................................................................... 119

Delete a stored print job ................................................................................... 120

8 Copy

Use the Copy screen ......................................................................................................................... 122

Set the default copy options .............................................................................................................. 123

Basic copy instructions ...................................................................................................................... 124

Copy from the scanner glass ............................................................................................ 124

Copy from the document feeder ....................................................................................... 124

Adjust the copy settings ..................................................................................................................... 125

Copy two-sided documents ............................................................................................................... 126

Copying two-sided documents manually .......................................................................... 126

Copy two-sided documents automatically ........................................................................ 126

Copy mixed-size originals .................................................................................................................. 128

Change the copy-collation setting ..................................................................................................... 129

Copy photos and books ..................................................................................................................... 130

Combine copy jobs by using Job Build .............................................................................................. 131

Cancel a copy job .............................................................................................................................. 132

Job storage features for copy ............................................................................................................ 133

Create a stored copy job ................................................................................................... 133

Print a stored copy job ...................................................................................................... 133

Delete a stored copy job ................................................................................................... 133

9 Scan and send to e-mail

Configure the device to send e-mail .................................................................................................. 136

Supported protocols .......................................................................................................... 136

Configure e-mail server settings ....................................................................................... 136

Use the Send E-mail screen .............................................................................................................. 138

vi ENWW

Perform basic e-mail functions .......................................................................................................... 139

Load documents ............................................................................................................... 139

Send documents ............................................................................................................... 139

Send a document ............................................................................................. 139

Use the auto-complete function ....................................................................... 140

Use the address book ........................................................................................................................ 141

Create a recipient list ........................................................................................................ 141

Use the local address book .............................................................................................. 141

Add e-mail addresses to the local address book ............................................. 142

Delete e-mail addresses from the local address book ..................................... 142

Change e-mail settings for the current job ........................................................................................ 143

Scan to a folder .................................................................................................................................. 144

Scan to a workflow destination .......................................................................................................... 145

10 Fax

Analog fax .......................................................................................................................................... 148

Connect the fax accessory to a phone line ....................................................................... 148

Configure and use the fax features .................................................................................. 148

Digital fax ........................................................................................................................................... 150

11 Manage and maintain

Information pages .............................................................................................................................. 152

Embedded Web server ...................................................................................................................... 154

Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection .................................... 154

Embedded Web server sections ....................................................................................... 155

HP Easy Printer Care ........................................................................................................................ 158

Supported operating systems ........................................................................................... 158

Open the HP Easy Printer Care software ......................................................................... 158

HP Easy Printer Care software sections .......................................................................... 158

Use HP Web Jetadmin software ....................................................................................................... 161

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh ......................................................................................................... 162

Open the HP Printer Utility ................................................................................................ 162

Print a cleaning page ........................................................................................................ 162

Print a configuration page ................................................................................................. 162

View supplies status ......................................................................................................... 163

Order supplies online and use other support features ..................................................... 163

Upload a file to the printer ................................................................................................. 163

Update the firmware ......................................................................................................... 164

Activate the two-sided printing (duplexing) mode ............................................................. 164

Lock or unlock printer storage devices ............................................................................. 164

Save or print stored jobs ................................................................................................... 164

Configure trays .................................................................................................................. 165

Change network settings .................................................................................................. 165

Open the embedded Web server ..................................................................................... 165

Set up e-mail alerts ........................................................................................................... 166

Security features ................................................................................................................................ 167

Secure the embedded Web server ................................................................................... 167

Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) ....................................................................................... 167

Requirements ................................................................................................... 167

Use the FIH ...................................................................................................... 167

ENWW vii

Enable the FIH portal ...................................................................... 168

Disable the FIH portal ...................................................................... 168

Secure Disk Erase ............................................................................................................ 168

Data affected .................................................................................................... 169

Gain access to Secure Disk Erase .................................................................. 169

Additional Information ...................................................................................... 169

Security Lock .................................................................................................................... 169

Authentication ................................................................................................................... 169

Lock the control-panel menus ........................................................................................... 170

Set the real-time clock ....................................................................................................................... 171

Clean the MFP ................................................................................................................................... 172

Print a cleaning page ........................................................................................................ 172

Clean the MFP hardware .................................................................................................. 172

Clean the ADF delivery system ........................................................................................ 175

Calibrate the scanner ........................................................................................................................ 180

Configure alerts ................................................................................................................................. 181

Manage supplies ............................................................................................................................... 182

HP print cartridges ............................................................................................................ 182

Non-HP print cartridges .................................................................................................... 182

Print cartridge authentication ............................................................................................ 182

HP fraud hotline ................................................................................................................ 182

Print cartridge storage ...................................................................................................... 182

Print cartridge life expectancy ........................................................................................... 183

Check the print cartridge life ............................................................................................. 183

On the MFP control panel ................................................................................ 183

In the embedded Web server ........................................................................... 183

Through HP Easy Printer Care ........................................................................ 183

Through HP Web Jetadmin .............................................................................. 183

Printer maintenance kit ...................................................................................................................... 184

Manage memory ................................................................................................................................ 185

Determine memory requirements ..................................................................................... 185

Install memory ................................................................................................................... 185

Verify memory installation ................................................................................................. 188

Economy settings .............................................................................................................................. 189

Sleep and wake ................................................................................................................ 189

12 Problem solve

Solve problems .................................................................................................................................. 192

Troubleshooting checklist ................................................................................................. 192

Determining Solve MFP problems ..................................................................................................... 193

Control-panel message types ............................................................................................................ 194

Control-panel messages .................................................................................................................... 195

Clear jams .......................................................................................................................................... 196

Clear jams from the duplexer ............................................................................................ 197

Clear jams from the input-tray areas ................................................................................ 199

Clear jams from the output areas ..................................................................................... 202

Solve repeated jams ......................................................................................................... 215

Media-handling problems .................................................................................................................. 216

Printer feeds multiple sheets ............................................................................................ 216

Printer feeds incorrect page size ...................................................................................... 216

viii ENWW

Printer pulls from incorrect tray ......................................................................................... 216

Media does not feed automatically ................................................................................... 217

Media does not feed from tray 2, 3, or 4 ........................................................................... 217

Transparencies will not feed ............................................................................................. 218

Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP ....................................................................... 218

Output is curled or wrinkled .............................................................................................. 219

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly .................................................................. 219

Solve print-quality problems .............................................................................................................. 220

Print-quality problems associated with media .................................................................. 220

Print-quality problems associated with the environment .................................................. 220

Print-quality problems associated with jams ..................................................................... 220

Light print (partial page) .................................................................................................... 221

Light print (entire page) ..................................................................................................... 221

Specks .............................................................................................................................. 222

Dropouts ........................................................................................................................... 222

Lines .................................................................................................................................. 223

Gray background .............................................................................................................. 223

Toner smear ...................................................................................................................... 224

Loose toner ....................................................................................................................... 224

Repeating defects ............................................................................................................. 225

Repeating image ............................................................................................................... 225

Misformed characters ....................................................................................................... 226

Page skew ........................................................................................................................ 226

Curl or wave ...................................................................................................................... 227

Wrinkles or creases .......................................................................................................... 227

Vertical white lines ............................................................................................................ 228

Tire tracks ......................................................................................................................... 228

White spots on black ......................................................................................................... 228

Scattered lines .................................................................................................................. 229

Blurred print ...................................................................................................................... 229

Random image repetition .................................................................................................. 230

Solve fax problems ............................................................................................................................ 231

Solve copy problems ......................................................................................................................... 232

Prevent copy problems ..................................................................................................... 232

Image problems ................................................................................................................ 232

Media-handling problems ................................................................................................. 233

Performance problems ..................................................................................................... 235

Solve e-mail problems ....................................................................................................................... 236

Validate the SMTP gateway address ............................................................................... 236

Validate the LDAP gateway address ................................................................................ 236

Solve network connectivity problems ................................................................................................ 237

Solve network printing problems ...................................................................................... 237

Verify communication over the network ............................................................................ 237

Solve common Macintosh problems ................................................................................................. 239

Appendix A Supplies and accessories

Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................. 244

Order directly from HP ...................................................................................................... 244

Order through service or support providers ...................................................................... 244

ENWW ix

Order directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to a network) ............................................................................................................................ 244

Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software .............................................. 244

Part numbers ..................................................................................................................................... 245

Appendix B Service and support

Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ..................................................................................... 247

Customer self repair warranty service ............................................................................................... 248

Print cartridge limited warranty statement ......................................................................................... 249

HP Customer Care ............................................................................................................................ 250

Online Services ................................................................................................................. 250

Telephone support ............................................................................................................ 250

Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information ....................................................... 250

HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies ................................................................. 250

HP service information ...................................................................................................... 250

HP service agreements .................................................................................................... 250

HP Easy Printer Care ....................................................................................................... 251

HP support and information for Macintosh computers ..................................................... 251

Appendix C Specifications

Physical specifications ....................................................................................................................... 254

Electrical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 255

Acoustic emissions ............................................................................................................................ 256

Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 256

Appendix D Regulatory information

FCC regulations ................................................................................................................................. 258

Environmental product stewardship program .................................................................................... 259

Protecting the environment ............................................................................................... 259

Ozone production .............................................................................................................. 259

Power consumption .......................................................................................................... 259

Toner consumption ........................................................................................................... 259

Paper use .......................................................................................................................... 259

Plastics .............................................................................................................................. 259

HP LaserJet print supplies ................................................................................................ 260

Return and recycling instructions ..................................................................................... 260

United States and Puerto Rico ......................................................................... 260

Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges) ......................................... 260

Single returns .................................................................................. 260

Shipping ........................................................................................... 260

Non-US returns ................................................................................................ 261

Paper ................................................................................................................................. 261

Material restrictions ........................................................................................................... 262

Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union .... 262

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................. 263

For more information ........................................................................................................ 263

Country/region specific statements ................................................................................................... 264

Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................. 264

Laser safety ...................................................................................................................... 264

x ENWW

Canadian DOC regulations ............................................................................................... 265

VCCI statement (Japan) ................................................................................................... 265

Power cord statement (Japan) .......................................................................................... 265

EMI statement (Korea) ...................................................................................................... 265

EMI statement (Taiwan) .................................................................................................... 265

Laser statement for Finland .............................................................................................. 265

Index .................................................................................................................................................................. 267

ENWW xi

xii ENWW

1 Product Basics

Product introduction

Product features

Product walkaround

Output devices

ENWW 1

Product introduction

Figure 1-1

HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP

The HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP come standard with the following items:

100-sheet multipurpose input tray (tray 1)

Two 500-sheet input trays

One 2,000-sheet input tray

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100/1000Base-TX network (Gigabit support)

384 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)

Duplexer

Hard drive

Output device

2 Chapter 1 Product Basics ENWW

Product features

The HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP are designed to be shared by a workgroup. The MFP is a standalone copier that does not require connection to a computer. With the exception of network printing, you can select all functions at the MFP control panel.

Functions

Two-sided copying and printing

Image modification

Color digital sending

Black-and-white printing and copying

Wide-format printing

Document finishing

Speed and throughput

50 images per minute (ipm) when scanning and printing on letter-size or International Standards

Organization (ISO) A4-size paper (HP LaserJet M9050 MFP only)

40 ipm when scanning and printing on letter-size or ISO A4-size paper (HP LaserJet M9040

MFP only)

25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass

25% to 200% scalability when using the automatic document feeder (ADF)

Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology

Eight-seconds to first page

Duty cycle of up to 300,000 images per month

533 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor

Resolution

600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)

FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed

Up to 220 levels of gray

Memory

384 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 512 MB by using industry standard 100-pin double data rate dual inline memory modules (DDR DIMMs)

Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) that automatically compresses data to use RAM more efficiently

ENWW Product features 3

User interface

Graphical display on control panel

Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for network-connected products)

HP Toolbox software to provide MFP status and alerts and print internal information pages

Language and fonts

HP Printer Command Language (PCL) 6

HP PCL 5e for compatibility

Printer Management Language

80 scalable TrueType typefaces

HP postscript 3 emulation

Copying and sending

Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats

A job-interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)

Multiple pages per sheet

Operator attendance animations (for example, jam recovery)

The ability to copy books

E-mail compatibility

A sleep feature that saves energy

One-pass duplex scanning

Print cartridge

No-shake cartridge design

Authentic HP print cartridge detection

Automatic seal tab removal

Paper-handling

Input

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes.

Trays 2 and 3: Two 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect standard paper sizes up to 11 x 17/A3 and allow printing on custom-size paper.

Tray 4 (2000-sheet input tray): This tray automatically detects standard paper sizes up to

11 x 17/A3 and allows printing on custom-size paper.

4 Chapter 1 Product Basics ENWW

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF): Holds up to 100 sheets of Letter- or A4-size paper or

50 sheets of 11 x 17- or A3-size paper.

Duplex printing: Provides two-sided printing (printing both sides of the paper).

Output

The MFP includes one of the following output choices.

3000-sheet stacker: Stacks up to 3,000 sheets of paper.

Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 100 sheets of paper.

Lower bin (face-down): Holds up to 3,000 sheets of paper. The output bins are part of the output device.

3000-sheet stapler/stacker: Provides multiposition stapling for up to 50 sheets of paper per job, or a maximum job height of 5 mm (0.2 inch).

Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 100 sheets of paper.

Lower bin (face-down): Holds up to 3,000 sheets of paper. The output bins are part of the output device.

Multifunction finisher: Provides 1,000 sheets of stacking capacity, stapling for as many as 50 sheets of paper per document, plus folding and saddle stitching of booklets that contain up to 10 sheets of paper.

Upper bin (face-up and face-down): Holds up to 1,000 sheets of paper.

Lower booklet bin: Holds up to 50 booklets.

8-bin mailbox: A stacker, collator, or job separator that also provides eight mailbox bins that can be assigned to individual users or workgroups for easy identification and retrieval.

The 8-bin mailbox can stack up to 2,000 sheets of A4- or letter-size paper in all the bins.

Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 125 sheets of paper

Bins 1 through 8 (face-down): Each holds up to 250 sheets of paper

Connectivity

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 connection

A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for attaching third-party copy-control solutions.

HP JetDirect 635n IPv6/IPSec Print Server. Local area network (LAN)-connector (RJ-45) for the embedded print server

Optional analog fax card

Optional HP Jetdirect EIO print server cards

HP JetDirect 625n gigabit Ethernet internal print server

IPV6/IPSec

ENWW Product features 5

Environmental features

Sleep setting saves energy (meets Energy Star® guidelines, Version 1.0 HP LaserJet M9050

MFP only)

Firmware updates provide the ability to upgrade the MFP firmware. To download the latest firmware, go to www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp_firmware or www.hp.com/go/ljm9050mfp_firmware and follow the onscreen instructions. To easily send firmware updates to multiple products, use the HP Web Jetadmin software (go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin ).

Internal hard disk can be used to store selected print jobs. It can support RIP ONCE technology, and can permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the MFP. Unlike standard product memory, many items on the hard disk remain in the MFP even when the MFP is turned off.

Fonts that are downloaded to the hard disk are available to all users of the MFP.

Optional EIO hard disk accessory provides additional capacity for storing fonts and forms. The

MFP does not use the EIO hard disk accessory for tasks such as RIP ONCE and stored jobs.

The MFP uses the internal hard disk for these tasks. Both disks can be write-protected through software for additional security.

Security features

Foreign Interface Harness

Secure Disk Erase

Security lock

Job retention

Front-panel authentication

6 Chapter 1 Product Basics ENWW

Product walkaround

Figure 1-2

Product walkaround

ENWW

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

19

5

6

7

8

3

4

1

2

Document-feeder cover

Document feeder (ADF)

Control panel with touchscreen graphical display

Tray 1

Right door

Vertical transfer door

Tray 4

Tray 3

Tray 2

Left door (behind output device)

Output device

Front door

Duplex printing accessory (inside the MFP)

ADF output bin

Left door

Printer power cable

Tray 4 power cable

EIO slot 1

Copy processor EIO card

Product walkaround 7

Output devices

This MFP comes with a 3000-sheet stacker, a 3000-sheet stapler/stacker, a multifunction finisher, or an 8-bin mailbox.

3,000-sheet stacker

Stacks up to 3,000 sheets of A4- or letter-size paper

Stacks up to 1,500 sheets of A3- or ledger-size paper

Can offset jobs, or offset the first page of jobs

The lower bin (face-down bin) is the default bin for all output jobs.

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker

Paper handling features

Stacks up to 3,000 sheets A4- or letter-size paper

Stacks up to 1,500 sheets of A3- or ledger-size paper

Can offset jobs, or offset the first page of jobs

The upper bin (face-up bin) is the default bin for all output jobs.

Stapling information

The 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker can staple documents that contain between two pages and 50 pages of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, or equivalent 5 mm (0.2 inches). The pages must be 64 to 199 g/m 2

(17 to 53 lb) of all sizes that the MFP supports.

Heavier media might have a stapling limit of fewer than 50 pages.

Stapling will not be performed on less than two sheets or more than 50 though the MFP will copy or print the job.

Stapling is usually selected in your software program or printer driver. See Change printer-driver settings for more information. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver.

If the stapler cannot be selected in the program or printer driver, it can be selected through the MFP

control panel. See Staple documents on page 107 for instructions.

Multifunction finisher

Paper handling features

Stacks up to 1,000 sheets of A4- and letter-size paper or up to 500 sheets of A3- and 11 x 17size paper

Stacks up to 40 booklets of 5 sheets of A3- and ledger-size paper

Can offset jobs

8 Chapter 1 Product Basics ENWW

Staples up to 50 sheets of paper per document of A4- and letter-size paper

Staples up to 25 sheets of paper per document A3- and ledger-size paper

Folds single pages

Saddle-stitches and folds up to 40 booklets of 5 sheets stacked, or 20 booklets of 10 sheets stacked.

Stapling information

The finisher can staple documents that contain between two pages and 50 pages of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)

A-4-or letter-size paper or 25 pages of A3- 11 x 17-size paper or equivalent to 5.5 mm (0.22 inches).

The pages must be 64 to 199 g/m

2

(17 to 53 lb) of all sizes supported by the MFP.

Consider these additional points:

The upper bin (stacker bin) can hold up to 1,000 sheets stacked (not stapled). The multifunction finisher can deliver jobs face up or face down to the upper bin.

Heavier media might have a stapling limit of fewer than 50 pages.

If the job that you want stapled contains only one sheet, or if it contains more than 50 sheets, the multifunction finisher delivers the job without staples.

You can usually select the stapler in your software program or printer driver, although some options

might be available only in the printer driver. See Change printer-driver settings for Windows on page 55

for more information. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver.

If the stapler cannot be selected in the program or printer driver, it can be selected through the MFP

control panel. See Staple documents on page 107 for instructions.

Booklets

You can gain access to the booklet feature in some software programs, such as desktop publishing programs. See the user guide that came with your program for information about making booklets.

If you are using a program that does not support booklet making, you can create booklets by using the HP printer driver.

NOTE:

HP recommends that you use your program to prepare and preview your document for printing, and then use the HP printer driver to print and saddle stitch your booklet.

Use the following steps to create a booklet by using the printer driver:

Prepare your booklet: Arrange the pages on a sheet (called booklet imposition) to create a booklet. You can impose your booklet in your software program, or you can use the bookletprinting feature in printer driver.

Add a cover: Add a cover to your booklet by selecting a different first page with a different paper type. You can also add a cover of the same paper type as your booklet. Booklet covers must be the same size as the rest of the sheets in the booklet. However, the cover can be a different weight from the rest of the booklet.

Use saddle stitching: Paper must be fed into the MFP short edge first. The MFP prompts you for rotated paper. The multifunction finisher staples the center of your booklet (called saddle stitching). If your booklet contains only one sheet of paper, the multifunction finisher folds the

ENWW Output devices 9

sheet, but does not staple it. If the booklet contains more than one sheet of paper, the multifunction finisher staples the sheets, and then folds up to 10 sheets per booklet.

The booklet-printing feature of the multifunction finisher supports the saddle stitch and fold feature for the following paper sizes:

A3

A4-Rotated (A4-R)*

Letter-Rotated (Letter-R)*

Legal

Ledger

See the HP Multifunction Finisher User Guide at www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/ support/ljm9050mfp for more information about making booklets.

* A4-R and Letter-R are A4- and letter-size paper that is rotated 90˚ in the source tray.

8-bin mailbox

Handles high-capacity output that increases the MFP output capacity to 2,000 sheets of standard media

Uses the upper bin to provide 125 sheets of face-up stacking capacity

Delivers printed jobs face-down to the eight face-down bins, and each bin provides 250 sheets of stacking capacity

Offers stacking options in different operational modes: mailbox, stacker, job separator, and sorter/collator

For more information about the 8-bin mailbox, see the use guide that came with the 8-bin mailbox.

10 Chapter 1 Product Basics ENWW

2 Control panel

Use the control panel

Use the Administration menu

ENWW 11

Use the control panel

The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all device functions. Use the buttons and numeric keypad to control jobs and the device status. The LEDs indicate overall device status.

Control-panel layout

The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.

Figure 2-1

Control panel

1

4

5

6

2

3

7

8

9

10

Attention light

Data light

Ready light

Brightness-adjustment dial

Touchscreen graphical display

Numeric keypad

Sleep button

Reset

Stop

Start

button

button

button

The Attention light indicates that the device has a condition that requires intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message on the touchscreen.

The Data light indicates that the device is receiving data.

The Ready light indicates that the device is ready to begin processing any job.

Roll the dial to control the brightness of the touchscreen.

Use the touchscreen to open and set up all device functions.

Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other numeric values.

If the device is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a sleep mode. To place the device into sleep mode or to reactivate the device, press the Sleep button.

Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.

Stops the active job. While stopped, the control panel shows the options for the stopped job (for example, if you press the Stop button while the device is processing a print job, the control panel message prompts you to cancel or resume the print job).

Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that has been interrupted.

12 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Home screen

The home screen provides access to the device features, and it indicates the current status of the device.

NOTE:

Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear on the home screen can vary.

Figure 2-2

Home screen

ENWW

1

2 Device status line

5

6

3

4

7

8

Features

Copy count

Help button

Scroll bar

Sign Out

Network Address

Date and time

Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items:

Copy

Fax (Optional)

E-mail

Secondary E-mail

Network Folder

Job Storage

Workflow

Supplies Status

Administration

The status line provides information about the overall device status. Various buttons appear in this area, depending on the current status. For a description of each button that can appear in the status line, see

Buttons on the touchscreen on page 14 .

The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the device is set to make.

Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.

Touch Sign Out to sign out of the device if you have signed in for access to restricted features. After you sign out, the device restores all options to the default settings.

Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection.

The current date and time appear here. The system administrator can select the format that the device uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.

Use the control panel 13

Buttons on the touchscreen

The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the status of the device. Various buttons can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.

Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.

Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.

NOTE:

The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button is named Start Copy .

Error button. The error button appears whenever the device has an error that requires attention before it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has instructions for solving the problem.

Warning button. The warning button appears when the device has a problem but can continue functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also has instructions for solving the problem.

Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system. For more information, see

Control-panel help system on page 14 .

Control-panel help system

The device has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.

For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.

For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options for that screen.

If the device alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error ( ) or warning ( ) button to open a message that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.

14 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Use the Administration menu

Use the administration menu to set up default device behavior and other global settings, such as the language and the format for date and time.

NOTE:

Menus can be locked by the administrator. Contact the administrator if a menu or menu item is not available.

Navigate the Administration menu

From the Home screen, touch Administration to open the menu structure. You might need to scroll to the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature.

The Administration menu has several sub-menus, which are listed on the left side of the screen.

Touch the name of a menu to expand the structure. A plus sign (+) next to a menu name means that it contains sub-menus. Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure. To return to the previous level, touch Back .

To exit the Administration menu, touch the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen.

The device has built-in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus.

Help is available for many menus on the right-hand side of the touchscreen. Or, to open the global

Help system, touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.

The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 15

Information menu

Administration > Information

Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the device.

16 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Table 2-1 Information menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Configuration Page

Fax Reports is installed)

(only available if the

HP LaserJet Analog

Fax Accessory 300

Administration

Menu Map

Configuration Page

Supplies Status

Page

Usage Page

File Directory

Fax Activity Log

Fax Call Report

Billing Codes Report

Blocked Fax List

Speed Dial List

Sample Pages/Fonts PCL Font List

PS Font List

Fax Call Report

Print

Print

Print

Print

Print

Print

Print

Thumbnail on Report Yes

No (default)

When to Print Report Never auto print

Print after any fax job

Print after fax send jobs

Shows the basic structure of the

Administration menu and current administration settings.

A set of configuration pages that show the current device settings.

Shows the status of supplies such as cartridges, maintenance kit, and staples.

Shows information about the number of pages that have been printed on each paper type and size.

A directory page that contains information for any mass-storage devices, such as flash drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are installed in this device.

Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this device.

A detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received.

Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail of the first page of the fax on the report.

Print after any fax error (default)

Print after send errors only

Print after receive errors only

Print

Print

A list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes. This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code.

A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this device.

Print

Print

Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this device.

A list of printer control language (PCL) fonts that are currently available on the device.

Print A list of postscript fonts that are currently available on the device.

Default Job Options menu

Administration > Default Job Options

ENWW Use the Administration menu 17

Use this menu to define the default job options for each function. If the user does not specify the job options when creating the job, the default options are used.

The Default Job Options menu contains the following sub-menus:

Default Options for Originals

Default Copy Options

Default Fax Options

Default E-mail Options

Default Send To Folder Options

Default Print Options

Default Options for Originals

Administration > Default Job Options > Default Options for Originals

NOTE:

Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Table 2-2 Default Options for Originals menu

Menu item Values Description

Paper Size

Number of Sides

Orientation

Optimize Text/Picture

Image Adjustment

Heavy Originals

Select a paper size from the list.

Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan originals.

1 (default)

2

Select whether copy or scan originals are most often single-sided or double-sided.

Portrait (default)

Landscape

Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select

Landscape if the long edge is at the top.

Manually Adjust (default)

Text

Printed Picture

Darkness

Background Cleanup

Sharpness

Normal

Heavy Paper

Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of original. You can optimize the output for text, pictures, or a mixture.

If you select Manually Adjust , you can specify the mix of text and pictures that will most often be used.

Use this setting to optimize the output for darker or lighter originals that you scan or copy.

Increase the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.

Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image.

This setting is important for jobs that use the ADF. Changing this setting adjusts the tension on heavy paper as it moves through the scanning area. It can affect output quality for papers that weigh more than 100 g/m 2 .

18 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Default Copy Options

Administration > Default Job Options > Default Copy Options

NOTE:

Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Table 2-3 Default Copy Options menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Number of Copies

Set the default number of copies for a copy job.

Number of Sides

Staple/Collate

Output Bin

Edge-To-Edge

Auto Include Margins

Staple

Collate

Type the number of copies. The factory default setting is 1.

1 (default)

2

None (default)

Staple options

Off

On (default)

Bin numbers/name

Normal (recommended)

(default)

Edge-To-Edge Output

Off (default)

On

Set the default number of sides for copies.

Set up options for stapling and collating sets of copies. When you make multiple copies of a document, collating places the pages in the correct order, one set at a time, rather than placing all copies of each page next to each other.

Select the default output bin, if applicable, for copies.

If the original document is printed close to the edges, use the Edge-To-Edge feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies.

Select this feature to ensure that the entire image appears on the copy, including any content that is close to the edges. If necessary, the device shrinks the image slightly, depending on the size of the printable area on the paper.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 19

Default Fax Options

Administration > Default Job Options > Default Fax Options

Administration > Default Job Options > Default Fax Options

NOTE:

This menu is only available if the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 is installed.

Table 2-4 Fax Send menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Resolution

Fax Header

Standard (100x200dpi)

(default)

Fine (200x200dpi)

Superfine (300x300dpi)

Prepend (default)

Overlay

Set the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file size is smaller.

Select the position of the fax header on the page.

Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax content and move the fax content down on the page.

Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of the fax contents without moving the contents down.

Using Overlay could prevent a single-page fax from flowing onto another page.

Table 2-5 Fax Receive menu

Menu item

Fax Forwarding

Stamp Received Faxes

Fit to Page

Fax Paper Tray

Output Bin

Values

Fax Forwarding

Change PIN

Enabled

Disabled (default)

Enabled (default)

Disabled

Select Automatic or a specific tray.

<Binname>

Description

To forward received faxes to another fax device, select Fax

Forwarding and Custom . Then type the number of the other fax device into the Forward to Number field. When you select this menu item for the first time, you are prompted to set up a PIN.

Type that PIN every time you use this menu. This is the same PIN that is used to access the Fax Printing menu. This PIN is exactly four digits.

Add the date, time, senders phone number, and page number to each page of the faxes that this device receives.

Shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If it this feature set to

Disabled , faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple pages.

Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use for incoming faxes.

Select the default output bin, if applicable, to use for faxes.

20 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Default E-mail Options

Administration > Default Job Options > Default E-mail Options

Use this menu to set default options for e-mails that are sent from the device.

NOTE:

Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Menu item

Document File Type

Description

Choose the file format for the e-mail.

Output Quality

Resolution

Color/Black

TIFF Version

Values

PDF (default)

JPEG

TIFF

M-TIFF

High (large file)

Medium (default)

Low (small file)

300 DPI

200 DPI

150 DPI (default)

75 DPI

Color scan (default)

Black/white scan

TIFF 6.0 (default)

TIFF (Post 6.0)

Choosing higher quality for output increases the size of the output file.

Use this feature to select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller files.

Specify whether the e-mail will be in black or in color.

Use this feature to specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 21

Default Send to Folder Options

Administration > Default Job Options > Default Send to Folder Options

Use this menu to set default options for scan jobs sent to the computer.

NOTE:

Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Menu item

Color/Black

Description

Specify whether the file will be in black or in color.

Document File Type

TIFF Version

Output Quality

Resolution

Values

Color scan

Black/white scan (default)

PDF (default)

M-TIFF

TIFF

JPEG

TIFF 6.0 (default)

TIFF (post 6.0)

High (large file)

Medium (default)

Low (small file)

75 DPI

150 DPI (default)

200 DPI

300 DPI

400 DPI

600 DPI

Choose the file format for the file.

Use this feature to specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.

Choosing higher quality for output increases the size of the output file.

Use this feature to select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller files.

22 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Default Print Options

Administration > Default Job Options > Default Print Options

Use this menu to set default options for jobs that are sent from a computer.

NOTE:

Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Table 2-6 Default Print Options menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Copies Per Job

Default Paper Size

Default Custom Paper

Size

Output Bin

Print Sides

2-Sided Format

Unit of measure

X Dimension

Y Dimension

Type a value.

(List of supported sizes.)

Millimeters

Inches

<Binname>

1-sided (default)

2-sided

Long edge

Short edge

Use this feature to set the default number of copies for print jobs.

Choose a paper size.

Configure the default paper size that is used when the user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job.

Configure the width measurement for the Default Custom Paper Size .

Configure the height measurement for the Default Custom Paper Size .

Select the default output bin for print jobs.

Use this feature to select whether print jobs should be single-sided or doublesided by default.

Use this feature to configure the default style for 2-sided print jobs. If

Long edge is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up.

This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If Short edge is selected, the back side of the page is printed upside-down. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 23

Time/Scheduling menu

Administration > Time/Scheduling

Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the device to enter and exit sleep mode.

NOTE:

Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Table 2-7 Time/Scheduling menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Date/Time Date Format

Date

YYYY/MMM/DD

(default)

MMM/DD/YYYY

DD/MMM/YYYY

Use this feature to set the current date and time, and to set the date format and time format that are used to time-stamp outgoing faxes.

Time Format

Month

Day

Year

Time

12 hour (AM/PM)

(default)

24 hour

Time Zone

Hour

Minute

AM

PM

Sleep Delay

Use this feature to set the time zone for your location and to select whether the device should automatically adjust for daylight-saving time.

Use this feature to select the time interval that the device should remain inactive before entering Sleep Mode.

Wake Time Monday

Tuesday

1 Minute

20 minutes

30 minutes

45 minutes (default)

1 hour (60 minutes)

90 minutes

2 hours

4 hours

Off (default)

Custom

Select Custom to set a wake time for each day of the week. The device exits sleep mode according to this schedule. Using a sleep schedule helps conserve energy and

24 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Table 2-7 Time/Scheduling menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

Sleep Time

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Sunday

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Sunday

Fax Printing Mode Fax Printing (only available if the

HP LaserJet Analog

Fax Accessory 300 is installed)

Change PIN

Values

Off (default)

Custom

Description

prepares the device for use so that users do not have to wait for it to warm up.

Select Custom to set a sleep time for each day of the week. The device is put in sleep mode according to this schedule. Using a sleep schedule helps conserve energy.

Store all received faxes

Print all received faxes (default)

Use Fax Printing

Schedule

If you have concerns about the security of private faxes, use this feature to store faxes rather than having them automatically print by creating a printing schedule.

For the fax printing schedule, the control panel prompts you to select days and times to print faxes.

Select Change PIN to change the PIN number that users must provide to access the Fax Printing menu and the Fax

Forwarding menu. This PIN is exactly four digits.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 25

Management menu

Administration > Management

Use this menu to set up global device-management options.

NOTE:

Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Table 2-8 Management menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Network Address Button

Stored Job Management Quick Copy Job Storage

Limit

Quick Copy Job Held

Timeout

Sleep mode

Manage Supplies Replace black cartridge

Supply Low/Order

Threshold

Display (default)

Hide

Select the maximum number of jobs to store

Off (default)

1 Hour

Select this option to display the

Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are stored on the device.

Network Address button on the control-panel home screen.

4 hours

1 Day

1 Week

Disable

Use Sleep Delay (default)

Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings for this device.

Select Use Sleep Delay to set the device to enter sleep mode after the delay that is specified in the

Time/Scheduling menu.

Stop at low

Stop at out

Override at out (default)

Use this menu to carry out administrative supply management tasks such as changing the threshold when supplies should be ordered.

Select a value in the range.

26 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Initial Setup menu

Administration > Initial Setup

The Initial Setup menu contains the sub-menus shown:

Networking and I/O menu

Fax Setup menu

E-mail Setup menu

NOTE:

Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Networking and I/O

Administration > Initial Setup > Networking and I/O

Table 2-9 Networking and I/O

Menu item Sub-menu item Values

I/O Timeout

Embedded Jetdirect

EIO <X> Jetdirect

Description

Select a value in the range. The factory default setting is

15 seconds.

I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job fails. If the stream of data that the device receives for a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how long the device will wait before it reports that the job has failed.

See

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus on page 27 for the list of options.

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus

Menu item Sub-menu item

TCP/IP Enable

Host Name

IPV4 Settings

Sub-menu item

Config Method

Values and Description

Off : Disable the TCP/IP protocol.

On (default): Enable the TCP/IP protocol.

An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the device. This name is listed on the

HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.

Specifies the method by which TCP/IPv4 parameters for the HP Jetdirect print server will be configured.

Bootp : Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic configuration from a BootP server.

DHCP (Default): Use DHCP (Dynamic Host

Configuration Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP Release and DHCP Renew menus are available to set DHCP lease options.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 27

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

IPV6 Settings

DHCP Release

DHCP Renew

Manual Settings

Default IP

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

Enable

Values and Description

Auto IP : Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing.

An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically.

Manual : Use the Manual Settings menu to configure

TCP/IPv4 parameters.

This menu appears if Config Method was set to

DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.

No (default): The current DHCP lease is saved.

Yes : Release the current IP address. Note that the printer will lose network connectivity until it reboots at which point it may have a new address.

This menu appears if Config Method was set to

DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.

No (default): The print server does not request to renew the DHCP lease.

Yes : The print server renews the lease on it's IP address.

(Available only if Config Method is set to Manual )

Configure parameters directly from the printer control panel:

IP Address : The unique IP address of the printer

(n.n.n.n), where n is a value from 0 to 255.

Subnet Mask : The subnet mask for the printer

(m.m.m.m), where m is a value from 0 to 255.

Syslog Server : The IP address of the syslog server used to receive and log syslog messages.

Default Gateway : The IP address of the gateway or router used for communications with other networks.

Idle Timeout : The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed

(default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).

Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or

DHCP).

Auto IP : A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set.

Legacy : The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect devices.

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS

Server.

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary

Domain Name System (DNS) Server.

Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server.

28 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

Proxy Server

Proxy Port

Address

DHCPV6 Policy

Primary DNS

Manual Settings

Values and Description

Off (default): IPv6 is disabled.

On : IPv6 is enabled.

Use this item to manually configure an IPv6 address.

Manual Settings : Use the Manual Settings menu to enable and manually configure a TCP/ IPv6 address.

Router Specified (Default): The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server.

Router Unavailable : If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server.

Always : Whether or not a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server.

Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary DNS server that the print server should use.

Use this item to manually set IPv6 addresses on the print server.

Enable : Select this item and choose On to enable manual configuration, or Off to disable manual configuration.

Address : Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit

IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal syntax.

Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the device. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches

Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security, for those clients.

To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to

255 octets.

For some networks, you may need to contact your

Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address.

Type the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 29

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item

IPX/SPX Enable

Frame Type

Sub-menu item

A Talk

DLC/LLC

Security

Diagnostics

Enable

Enable

Print Sec Page

Secure Web

IPsec or Firewall

Reset Security

Embedded Test

Values and Description

Off : Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.

On (default): Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.

Selects the frame-type setting for your network.

Auto (Default): Automatically sets and limits the frame type to the first one detected.

EN_8023 , EN_II , EN_8022 , and EN_SNAP : Frametype selections for Ethernet networks.

Off : Disable the AppleTalk protocol.

On (default): Enable the AppleTalk protocol.

Off : Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.

On (default): Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.

Yes : Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.

No (default): A security settings page is not printed.

For configuration management, specify whether the embedded Web server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS.

HTTPS Required (Default) : For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted.

The print server will appear as a secure site.

HTTP/HTTPS optional : Access using either HTTP or

HTTPS is permitted.

Specify the IPsec or Firewall status on the print server.

Keep : IPsec/Firewall status remains the same as currently configured.

Disable (Default): IPsec/Firewall operation on the print server is disabled.

Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.

No (default): The current security settings are maintained.

Yes : Security settings are reset to factory defaults.

This menu provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.

Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the device. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server. After you

30 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

LAN HW Test

HTTP Test

SNMP Test

Select All Tests

Data Path Test

Execution Time [H]

Execute

Values and Description

select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select Execute to initiate the test.

Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the device is turned off, or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.

CAUTION:

Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration.

This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network.

Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the device, and tests the embedded Web server.

Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the device.

Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

Use this item to select all available embedded tests.

Select Yes to choose all tests. Select No to select individual tests.

This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation device. It sends a predefined PS file to the device,

However, the test is paperless; the file will not print.

Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. You can select a value from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or device is turned off.

Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data

Path tests is printed after the tests have completed.

No *: Do not initiate the selected tests.

Yes : Initiate the selected tests.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 31

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item

Ping Test

Sub-menu item

Dest Type

Dest IP

Packet Size

Timeout

Count

Print Results

Execute

Values and Description

This test is used to check network communications.

This test sends link-level packets to a remote network host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a ping test, set the following items:

Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6 node.

IPV4 : Type the IPv4 address.

IPV6 : Type the IPv6 address.

Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the maximum is 2048.

Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The default is 1 and the maximum is 100.

Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test to run continuously, select 0.

If the ping test was not set for continuous operation, you can choose to print the test results. Select Yes to print results. If you select No (default), results are not printed.

Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select Yes to initiate the test, or No to not run the test.

32 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item

Ping Results

Sub-menu item

Packets Sent

Packets Received

Percent Lost

RTT Min

RTT Max

RTT Average

Ping In Progress

Refresh

Link Speed

Values and Description

Use this item to view the ping test status and results using the control panel display. You can select the following items:

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed.

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed.

Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed.

Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.

Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.

Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to

4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.

Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes indicates a test in progress, and No indicates that a test completed or was not run.

When viewing the ping test results, this item updates the ping test data with current results. Select Yes to update the data, or No to maintain the existing data.

However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu.

The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the device and installed print server. Select one of the following link configuration settings:

CAUTION:

If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network device might be lost.

Auto (default): The print server uses auto-negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/ switch port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)

10T Half : 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

10T Full : 10 Mbps, Full-duplex operation.

100TX Half : 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 33

Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

Print Protocols

Values and Description

100TX Full : 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.

100TX Auto : Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps.

1000TX Full : 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation.

Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration of the following protocols: IPX/SPX,

Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC.

34 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Fax Setup

Administration > Initial Setup > Fax Setup

Administration > Initial Setup > Fax Setup

NOTE:

This menu is only available if the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 is installed.

Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Required Settings

PC Fax Send

Country/Region

Date/Time

Fax Header

Information

Phone Number

Company Name

(Countries/regions listed)

Disabled

Enabled (default)

Configure the settings that are legally required for outgoing faxes.

Use this feature to enable or disable PC

Fax Send. PC Fax Send enables users to send faxes through the device from their computers if they have the Send Fax driver installed.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 35

Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

Fax Send Settings Fax Dial Volume

Error Correction

Mode

JBIG Compression

Maximum Baud Rate

TCF T.30 Delay

Timer

TCF Extend

Dialing Mode

Redial On Busy

Redial On No

Answer

Values

Off

Low (default)

High

Enabled (default)

Disabled

Description

Use this feature to set the volume of the tones that you hear while the device dials the fax number.

Enabled (default)

Disabled

Select a value from the list. The default is 33.6K.

Default (default)

Custom

Default (default)

Custom

When Error Correction Mode is enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission, the device sends or receives the error portion again.

JBIG compression reduces faxtransmission time, which can result in lower phone charges. However, using JBIG compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off JBIG compression.

Use this feature to set the maximum baud rate for receiving faxes. This can be used as a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax problems.

This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide.

This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide.

Select whether the device should use tone or pulse dialing.

Tone (default)

Pulse

The range is between 0 and 9.

The factory default is 3 times.

Never (default)

Once

Twice

Type the number of times the device should attempt to redial if the line is busy.

Use this feature to specify the number of times the device should attempt to dial if the recipient fax number does not answer.

NOTE: Twice is available in locations other than the United States and Canada.

36 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item

Redial Interval

Detect Dial Tone

Dialing Prefix

Billing Codes

Fax Receive Settings Rings To Answer

Ring Interval

Ring Frequency

Ringer Volume

Blocked Fax

Numbers

Sub-menu item

Add Blocked

Numbers

Remove Blocked

Numbers

Clear All Blocked

Numbers

Values Description

The range is between 1 and 5 minutes. The factory default is 5 minutes.

Use this feature to specify the number of minutes between dialing attempts if the recipient number is busy or not answering.

Enabled

Disabled (default)

Off (default)

Custom

Off (default)

Custom

Use this feature to specify whether the device should check for a dial tone before sending a fax.

Use this feature to specify a prefix number that must be dialed when sending faxes from the device.

When billing codes are enabled, a prompt appears that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax.

The range varies by location. The factory default is 2 rings.

Default (default)

Custom

Default (default)

Custom

The range is between 1 and 16 digits. The default is 1 digit.

Use this feature to specify the number of rings that must occur before the fax modem answers.

This setting is used to adjust for some PBX ring signals. Change this setting only when directed by an HP technical support agent.

This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide.

Set the volume for the fax ring-tone.

Off

Low (default)

High

Type the fax number to add.

Select a fax number to remove.

No (default)

Yes

Use this feature to add or delete numbers from the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list can contain up to 30 numbers. When the device receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job-accounting information.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 37

E-mail Setup

Administration > Initial Setup > E-mail Setup

Use this menu to enable the e-mail feature and to configure basic e-mail settings.

NOTE:

To configure advanced e-mail settings, use the embedded Web server. For more information, see

Embedded Web server on page 154 .

Table 2-12 E-mail Setup menu

Menu item Values Description

Address Validation

Find Send Gateways

SMTP Gateway

Test Send Gateway

On (default)

Off

Enter a value.

This option enables the device to check e-mail syntax when you type an e-mail address. Valid e-mail addresses require the "@" sign and a ".".

Search the network for SMTP gateways that the device can use to send e-mail.

Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send email from the device.

Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional.

Send Setup menu

Administration > Initial Setup > Send Setup

Table 2-13 Send Setup menu

Menu item Values Description

Replicate MFP

Allow Transfer to New DSS

Enter a value (IP Address).

Off

On (default)

Copy the local Send settings from one device to another.

Use this feature to allow the transfer of the device from one

HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server to another.

HP DSS is a software package that handles digital sending tasks such as faxing, e-mail, and sending a scanned document to a network folder.

This feature allows you to configure the device for use with an

HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server.

Allow Use of Digital Send Service Off

Fax Number Confirmation

On (default)

Disable (default)

Enable

Fax Number Speed Dial

Matching

Disable (default)

Enable

Enable fax number confirmation for fax numbers that are entered at the device control panel. When fax number confirmation is enabled, the fax number must be entered twice to ensure that it was entered correctly.

If this feature is enabled, the MFP tries to match any fax number entered with existing entries in the speed dial list. If a match is found, you can confirm the match and have the MFP complete the faxing action automatically.

38 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Device Behavior menu

Administration > Device Behavior

NOTE:

Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Language

Key Press Sound

Inactivity Timeout

Warning/Error

Behavior

Clearable Warnings

Continuable Events

Jam Recovery

Select the language from the list.

On (default)

Off

Type a value between 10 and 300 seconds. The factory default is 60 seconds.

On

Use this feature to select a different language for control-panel messages.

When you select a new language, the keyboard layout might also change.

Use this feature to specify whether you hear a sound when you touch the screen or press buttons on the control panel.

Use this feature to specify the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control panel and the device resetting to the default settings.

Job (default)

Use this feature to set the amount of time that a clearable warning appears on the control panel.

Auto continue (10 seconds) (default)

Press OK to continue

Use this option to configure the device behavior when the device encounters certain errors.

Auto (default)

On

Use this feature to configure how the device handles pages that are lost during a jam.

Off

ENWW Use the Administration menu 39

Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

Tray Behavior Use Requested Tray

Manually Feed

Prompt

PS Defer Media

Use Another Tray

Size/Type Prompt

Duplex Blank Pages

[output device menu]

NOTE:

This menu varies depending on the output device installed.

General Copy

Behavior

Hold Off Print Job

Hold Off Time

Values

Exclusively (default)

First

Always (default)

Unless Loaded

Description

Use this feature to control how the device handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray.

Use this feature to indicate whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the device pulls from the multipurpose tray instead.

Use this feature to choose either the postscript (PS) or HP paper-handling model.

Enabled (default)

Disabled

Enabled (default)

Disabled

Display

Do not display

(default)

Auto (default)

Yes

Use this feature to turn on or off the controlpanel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty.

Use this feature to control whether the tray configuration message appears whenever a tray is opened or closed.

Use this feature to control how the device handles two-sided jobs (duplexing).

Use this menu to set the finishing options for the installed output device.

Scan Ahead

Auto Print Interrupt

Copy Interrupt

On

Off

Enabled (default)

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled (Default)

Enabled

Disabled (Default)

Prevents print jobs from beginning to print while a walk-up user is setting up a job.

Prevents non-copy print jobs from starting for a specified time after a copy job is completely printed.

Use this feature to turn on no-wait scanning. With Scan Ahead enabled, the pages in the original document are scanned to disk and held until the device becomes available.

When this feature is enabled, copy jobs can interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple copies.

The copy job is inserted into the print queue at the end of one copy of the print job. After the copy job is complete, the device continues printing the remaining copies of the print job.

When this feature is enabled, a copy job that is currently printing can be interrupted when a new copy job is started. You are prompted to confirm that you want to interrupt the current job.

40 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

Alternative

Letterhead Mode

General Printing

Behavior

Override A4/Letter

Manual Feed

Edge-To-Edge

Override

Courier Font

Wide A4

Print PS Errors

Print PDF Errors

Personality

Values

Off (default)

On

No

Yes (default)

Enabled

Disabled (default)

Enabled

Disabled (default)

Regular (default)

Dark

Enabled

Disabled (default)

Enabled

Disabled (default)

Enabled (default)

Disabled

Auto (default)

PCL

PDF

PS

Description

Enable this feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all copy jobs, whether you are copying to one side of the sheet or to both sides of the sheet. When this option is selected, load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. The device speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides.

Use this feature to print on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the device (or to print on

A4 paper when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded). This option will also override A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3-size paper.

When this feature is enabled, the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job.

Use the feature to turn the edge-to-edge mode on or off for all print jobs. This mode can be overridden inside a print job by an edge-to-edge PJL variable.

Use this feature to select which version of the Courier font you want to use.

Use this feature to change the printable area of A4-size paper. If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper.

Use this feature to select whether a postscript (PS) error page is printed when the device encounters a PS error.

Use this feature to select whether a PDF error page is printed when the device encounters a PDF error.

Select the printer language that the device should use.

Normally you should not change the language. If you change the setting to a specific language, the device does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the device.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 41

Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item

PCL

Sub-menu item

Form Length

Orientation

Font Source

Font Number

Font Pitch

Font Point Size

Symbol Set

Append CR to LF

Suppress Blank

Pages

Media Source

Mapping

Values

Type a value between 5 and 128 lines. The factory default is 60 lines.

Portrait (default)

Landscape

Description

PCL is a set of printer commands that

Hewlett-Packard developed to provide access to printer features.

Select the source from the list.

Type the font number. The range is between 0 and

999. The factory default is 0.

Type a value between 0.44 and

99.99. The factory default is 10.00.

Type a value between 4.00 and

999.75. The factory default is 12.00.

PC-8 (default)

(50 additional symbol sets from which to choose)

No (default)

Yes

No (default)

Yes

Standard (default)

Classic

Select the orientation that is most often used print jobs. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select Landscape if the long edge is at the top.

Use this feature to select the font source for the user-defined soft default font.

Use this feature to specify the font number for the user-soft default font using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu item. The device assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list

(available from the Administration menu).

If Font Source and Font Number indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).

If Font Source and Font Number indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default point size (for a proportionalspaced font).

Use this feature to select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font.

Use this feature to configure whether a carriage return (CR) is appended to each line feed (LF) encountered in backwardscompatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control).

This option is for users who are generating their own PCL, which could include extra form feeds that would cause blank pages to be printed. When Yes is selected, form feeds are ignored if the page is blank.

Use this feature to select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the device driver, or when the software program has no option for tray selection.

42 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Print Quality menu

Administration > Print Quality

NOTE:

Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Table 2-15 Print Quality menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Set Registration Test Page Print (button)

Fuser Modes

Source

Adjust Tray <X>

Standby Fuser Mode

<Paper Type>

All trays

Tray <X>: <contents>

Tray <X>: <contents>

(choose a tray)

Shift from -20 to 20 along the X or Y axes. 0 is the default.

125° Celsius

Off

Print a test page for setting the registration. Follow the instructions that are printed on the page to adjust each tray.

Use Set Registration to shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back.

Select the source input tray for printing the Set

Registration page.

Perform the alignment procedure for each tray.

When it creates an image, the device scans across the page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to bottom into the device.

Set the temperature of the fuser when the MFP is in standby mode.

Resolution

Restore Modes

Configure the fuser mode associated with each media type.

Restore the fuser modes to the default settings.

Use this feature to select the print resolution.

REt

Economode

Toner Density

Small Paper Mode

Restore (button)

300

600

FastRes 1200 (default)

ProRes 1200

Off

Light

Medium (default)

Dark

Enabled

Disabled (default)

Choose from a range of

1 to 5. 3 is the default.

Normal (default)

Slow

Enable Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which produces print output with smooth angles, curves, and edges. All print resolutions, including

FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.

When Economode is enabled, the device prints with a reduced amount of toner per page; however, the print quality of the page is reduced.

Lighten or darken the print on the page. 1 is the lightest and 5 is the darkest.

Choose Slow to adjust the MFP for printing narrow media.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 43

Table 2-15 Print Quality menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item

Calibration/Cleaning Create Cleaning Page

Values

Create (button)

Process Cleaning Page Process (button)

Description

Generate a page for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in the fuser. The page has instructions that guide you through the cleaning process.

Process the cleaning page that was created by using the Create Cleaning Page menu item. The process takes up to 2.5 minutes.

44 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Troubleshooting menu

Administration > Troubleshooting

Administration > Troubleshooting

NOTE:

Many of the menu items under the Troubleshooting menu are for advanced troubleshooting purposes.

Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description

Event Log

Fax T.30 Trace

(only available if the

HP LaserJet Analog

Fax Accessory 300 is installed)

Print T.30 Report

When to Print Report

Print This shows the event codes and their corresponding engine cycles on the controlpanel display.

Never auto print

(default)

Print after any fax job

Print or configure the fax T.30 trace report.

T.30 is the standard that specifies handshaking, protocols, and error correction between fax machines.

Print after fax send jobs

Print after any fax error

Print after send errors only

Print after receive errors only

A value between 0 and 30. The default is 0.

Set loss levels to compensate for phoneline signal loss. Do not modify this setting unless requested to do so by an HP service representative because it could cause the fax to stop functioning.

Fax Transmit Signal

Loss (only available if the HP LaserJet

Analog Fax

Accessory 300 is installed)

Fax V.34

(only available if the

HP LaserJet Analog

Fax Accessory 300 is installed)

Fax Speaker Mode

(only available if the

HP LaserJet Analog

Fax Accessory 300 is installed)

Normal (default)

Off

Normal (default)

Diagnostic

Disable V.34 modulations if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it.

Use this feature to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 45

Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item

Paper Path Test Print Test Page

Service Test

Print/Stop Test

Scanner Tests

Control Panel

Source

Destination

Duplex

Copies

LEDs

Display

Buttons

Touchscreen

Values

Print

Description

Generate a test page for testing the paperhandling features. Define the path for the test in order to test specific paper paths.

Specify whether the test page is printed from all trays or from a specific tray.

All trays

Tray 1

Tray 2

(Additional trays are shown, if applicable.)

All bins

Stacker Bin

Standard Output Bin

Select the output option for the test page.

Send the test page to all output bins or only to a specific bin.

Off (default)

On

Select whether the duplexer should be included in the test.

1,10,50,100,500 Select how many pages should be sent from the specified source as part of the test.

Default=1

Follow the onscreen instructions.

Continuous value from 0 to 60,000 milliseconds.

Default: 0

Provides a series of prompts that the user can follow to discover if the printer is functioning properly. It also makes sure that paper is not in the paper path.

Isolate faults by stopping the device during the print cycle and observing where in the process the image degrades. To run the test, specify a stop time. The next job that is sent to the device stops at the specified time in the process.

A service technician can use this menu item to diagnose potential problems with the device scanner.

Verify that the components of the control panel are functioning correctly.

46 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

Resets menu

Administration > Resets

Table 2-17 Resets menu

Menu item Values

Clear Local Address Book Clear (button)

Description

Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that are stored on the device.

Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log.

Clear Fax Activity Log Yes

No (default)

Restore Factory Telecom Setting Restore (button)

Restore Factory Settings

Clear Maintenance Message

Reset Supplies

Lock Carriage

Restore

Clear

(button)

(button)

New Maintenance Kit (Yes/No)

Lock (button)

Use this option to restore the telephone-related settings that are in the Initial Setup menu to factory default values.

Use this feature to restore all device settings to their factory defaults.

Clear the Order maintenance kit and Replace maintenance kit warning messages.

Notify the device that a new maintenance kit has been installed.

Use the feature to lock the carriage. To unlock the carriage, turn the MFP off and then on.

Service menu

Administration > Service

The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel.

ENWW Use the Administration menu 47

48 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW

3 Software for Windows

Supported operating systems for Windows

Supported printer drivers for Windows

HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)

Select the correct printer driver for Windows

Priority for print settings

Change printer-driver settings for Windows

Install the Windows software

Supported utilities

Software for other operating systems

ENWW 49

Supported operating systems for Windows

The product supports the following Windows operating systems:

Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows 2000

Windows Vista

50 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Supported printer drivers for Windows

PCL 6

PCL 5 – Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver.

PS – Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver.

The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.

ENWW Supported printer drivers for Windows 51

HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)

The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built on proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.

The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and then customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically enables features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do not need to enable them manually.

For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/upd .

UPD installation modes

Traditional mode

Dynamic mode

Use this mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer.

When installed with this mode, UPD operates like traditional printer drivers.

If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer.

Use this mode if you are installing the driver for a mobile computer, so you can discover and print to HP products in any location.

Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.

To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/upd .

52 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Select the correct printer driver for Windows

Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product (using a printer language). Check the installation notes and readme files on the device

CD for additional software and languages.

HP PCL 6 driver description

Recommended for printing in all Windows environments

Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users

Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in

Windows environments

Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on

PCL 5

HP postscript emulation Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver Description

Recommended for printing with Adobe

®

software programs or with other highly graphicsintensive software programs

Provides support for printing from postscript level 3 emulation needs, or for postscript flash font support

Performs slightly faster than the PCL 6 driver when using Adobe software programs

HP PCL 5 Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver Description

Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments

Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products

The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs

The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to

PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)

Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple printer models

Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer

ENWW Select the correct printer driver for Windows 53

Priority for print settings

Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:

NOTE:

The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.

Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed anywhere else.

Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.

Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings anywhere else in the printing software.

Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes.

Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else.

54 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Change printer-driver settings for Windows

Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed

Change the default settings for all print jobs

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the driver, and then click

Properties or Preferences.

The steps can vary; this procedure is most common.

1.

Windows XP and Windows

Server 2003 (using the default

Start menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.

-or-

Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003

(using the Classic Start menu

view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

Change the product configuration settings

1.

Windows XP and Windows

Server 2003 (using the default

Start menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.

-or-

Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003

(using the Classic Start menu

view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

-or-

Windows Vista: Click Start, click

Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and

Sound click Printer.

-or-

Windows Vista: Click Start, click

Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and

Sound click Printer.

2.

Right-click the driver icon, and then select Printing Preferences.

2.

Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties.

3.

Click the Device Settings tab.

ENWW Change printer-driver settings for Windows 55

Install the Windows software

Install Windows software for direct connections

When installing the product software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software before connecting the USB cable. In addition, make sure to use a standard 2-meter USB cable.

1.

Close all software programs that are open or running.

2.

Insert the product CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:

a.

On the Start menu, click Run.

b.

Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).

c.

Click OK.

3.

When prompted, click Install.

The print driver screen appears.

4.

Select the driver to be installed and follow the instructions on the computer screen

5.

Click Finish when the installation has completed.

6.

From the Next Steps screen, select Add, Tonal options or driver if desired.

7.

Select Exit to close the installer.

8.

You might need to restart the computer.

9.

Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on the product CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the product box, or go to www.hp.com/support/ ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp for help or more information.

Install Windows software for networks

The software on the product CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For network installation on other operating systems, go to www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp .

The installer does not support product installation or object creation on Novell servers. It supports only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a product. To install the product and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web Jetadmin) or a

Novell utility (such as NWAdmin).

1.

If you are installing the software on Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or

Windows Vista, make sure that you have administrator privileges.

2.

Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server and printer are correctly connected to the network.

Print a configuration page, and find the HP Jetdirect page. On the HPJetdirect page, locate the

IP address that is currently configured. You might need this address to initially identify the product on your network and complete the installation.

56 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

3.

Close all software programs that are open or running.

4.

Insert the product CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:

a.

On the Start menu, click Run.

b.

Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).

c.

Click OK.

5.

When prompted, click Install. The print driver screen appears.

6.

Select the driver to be installed and follow the instructions on the computer screen

7.

Click Finish when the installation has completed.

8.

From the Next Steps screen, select Add, Tonal options or driver if desired.

9.

Select Exit to close the installer.

10.

You might need to restart the computer.

11.

Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

Remove software for Windows

1.

Click Start, and then click All Programs.

2.

Click HP, and then click HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP.

3.

Click Uninstall HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP, and then follow the onscreen instructions to remove the software.

ENWW Install the Windows software 57

Supported utilities

This MFP is equipped with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the MFP on a network.

HP Web Jetadmin

HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your intranet, and it should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.

To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .

When installed on a host server, a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later) by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.

Embedded Web server

The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet

Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox.

The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.

The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a networkconnected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see

Information pages on page 152

.)

For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see

Embedded Web server on page 154 .

HP Easy Printer Care

HP Easy Printer Care software is a program that you can use for the following tasks:

Check the product status

Check the supplies status and use HP SureSupply to shop online for supplies

Set up alerts

View product usage reports

View product documentation

Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools

Use HP Proactive Support to routinely scan your printing system and to prevent potential problems. HP Proactive Support can update software, firmware, and HP printer drivers.

You can view HP Easy Printer Care software when the product is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network.

58 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Supported operating systems

Supported browsers

Microsoft ® Windows 2000

Microsoft Windows XP, Service Pack 2 (Home and

Professional editions)

Microsoft Windows Server 2003

Microsoft Windows Vista™

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or 7.0

To download HP Easy Printer Care software , go to www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare . This Web site also provides updated information about supported browsers and a list of HP products that support

HP Easy Printer Care software.

For more information about using HP Easy Printer Care software, see

Open the HP Easy Printer

Care software on page 158 .

ENWW Supported utilities 59

Software for other operating systems

OS

UNIX

Linux

Software

For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing to download the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX.

For information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting .

60 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

4 Use the product with Macintosh

Software for Macintosh

Use features in the Macintosh printer driver

ENWW 61

Software for Macintosh

Supported operating systems for Macintosh

The device supports the following Macintosh operating systems:

Mac OS X V10.2.8, V10.3, V10.4 and later

NOTE:

For Mac OS V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.

Supported printer drivers for Macintosh

The HP installer provides PostScript ® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions

(PDEs), and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.

The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device features. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer.

Software installation types for Macintosh

Install Macintosh software for direct connections (USB)

Mac OS X V10.2.8

1.

Make sure the product is turned on.

2.

Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop.

3.

Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.

4.

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

5.

Connect a USB cable between the product USB port and the computer USB port. Use a standard 2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.

NOTE:

USB printer queues are created automatically when the product is attached to the computer. However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before the USB cable is connected.

6.

On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center.

7.

If the product name appears in the Printer list, setup is complete. If the product name does not appear in the printer list, continue with the next step.

8.

Click Add or +, and then select USB from the drop-down list. Select the product name from the printer list.

9.

Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are using.

10.

Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.

62 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW

Mac OS X V10.3 and later

1.

Make sure the product is turned on.

2.

Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop.

3.

Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.

4.

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

5.

Connect a USB cable between the product USB port and the computer USB port. Use a standard 2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.

NOTE:

USB printer queues are created automatically when the product is attached to the computer. However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before the USB cable is connected.

6.

From the Apple menu, click System Preferences and then Print & Fax.

7.

If the product name appears in the Printer list, setup is complete. If the product name does not appear in the printer list, continue with the next step.

8.

Click Add or +, and then select Default Browser or Default. Select the product name from the

Printer Browser.

9.

Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are using.

10.

Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.

Install Macintosh software for networks

Mac OS X V10.2.8

1.

Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.

2.

Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop.

3.

Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.

4.

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

5.

On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center.

6.

Click Add.

7.

From the drop-down list, select the connection type.

Rendezvous a.

Select the product from the list.

b.

Select the printer model if one is not already selected.

ENWW Software for Macintosh 63

IP Printing a.

Enter the IP address for the product.

b.

Select the printer model if one is not already selected.

8.

Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are using.

9.

Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.

Mac OS X V10.3 and later

1.

Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.

2.

Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop.

3.

Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.

4.

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

5.

From the Apple menu, click System Preferences and then Print & Fax.

6.

Click Add or +.

7.

Select the connection type.

Default Browser a.

Select the product from the list.

b.

From the Print Using drop-down list, select the printer model if one is not already selected.

IP Printer a.

From the Protocol drop-down list, select HP Jetdirect Socket.

b.

Enter the IP address for the product.

c.

From the Print Using drop-down list, select the printer model if one is not already selected.

8.

Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are using.

9.

Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.

Software for Macintosh computers

HP Printer Utility

Use the HP Printer Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.

64 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW

You can use the HP Printer Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is connected to a TCP/IP-based network.

Open the HP Printer Utility

Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2.8

1.

Open the Finder, and then click Applications.

2.

Click Library, and then click Printers.

3.

Click hp, and then click Utilities.

4.

Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.

5.

Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.

Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 and V10.4

1.

Open the Finder, click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.

2.

Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.

Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.5

From the Printer menu, click Printer Utility.

-or-

From the Print Queue, click the Utility icon.

HP Printer Utility features

The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list.

The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages.

Item

Configuration Page

Supplies Status

HP Support

File Upload

Upload Fonts

Firmware Update

Duplex Mode

Economode & Toner Density

Resolution

Lock Resources

Stored Jobs

Trays Configuration

Description

Prints a configuration page.

Shows the device supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering.

Provides access to technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and recycling and return information.

Transfers files from the computer to the device.

Transfers font files from the computer to the device.

Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device.

Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.

Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density.

Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting.

Locks or unlocks storage products, such as a hard disk.

Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk.

Changes the default tray settings.

ENWW Software for Macintosh 65

Item

IP Settings

Bonjour Settings

Additional Settings

E-mail Alerts

Description

Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server.

Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name that is listed on a network.

Provides access to the embedded Web server.

Configures the device to send e-mail notices for certain events.

Priority for print settings for Macintosh

Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:

NOTE:

The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.

Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override settings changed anywhere else.

Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.

Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes.

Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else.

Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh

Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed

Change the default settings for all print jobs

Change the product configuration settings

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Change the settings that you want on the various menus.

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

These settings are saved in the

Presets menu. To use the new settings, you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print.

Mac OS X V10.2.8

2.

Change the settings that you want on the various menus.

3.

On the Presets menu, click Save

as and type a name for the preset.

1.

In the Finder, on the Go menu, click Applications.

2.

Open Utilities, and then open

Print Center.

3.

Click on the print queue.

4.

On the Printers menu, click

Configure.

5.

Click the Installable Options menu.

NOTE:

Configuration settings might not be available in Classic mode.

66 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW

Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed

Change the default settings for all print jobs

Change the product configuration settings

Mac OS X V10.3 or Mac OS X V10.4

1.

From the Apple menu, click

System Preferences and then

Print & Fax.

2.

Click Printer Setup.

3.

Click the Installable Options menu.

Mac OS X V10.5

1.

From the Apple menu, click

System Preferences and then

Print & Fax.

2.

Click Options & Supplies.

3.

Click the Driver menu.

4.

Select the driver from the list, and configure the installed options.

Remove software from Macintosh operating systems

To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.

Supported utilities for Macintosh

Embedded Web server

The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet

Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox.

The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.

The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a networkconnected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see

Information pages on page 152

.)

For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see

Embedded Web server on page 154 .

ENWW Software for Macintosh 67

Use features in the Macintosh printer driver

Create and use printing presets in Macintosh

Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.

Create a printing preset

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

Select the print settings.

4.

In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset.

5.

Click OK.

Use printing presets

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

In the Presets box, select the printing preset that you want to use.

NOTE:

To use printer-driver default settings, select Standard.

Resize documents or print on a custom paper size

You can scale a document to fit on a different size of paper.

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Open the Paper Handling menu.

3.

In the area for Destination Paper Size, select Scale to fit paper size, and then select the size from the drop-down list.

4.

If you want to use only paper that is smaller than the document, select Scale down only.

Print a cover page

You can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such as

“Confidential”).

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

Open the Cover Page menu, and then select whether to print the cover page Before

Document or After Document.

4.

In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover page.

NOTE:

To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.

68 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW

Use watermarks

A watermark is a notice, such as “Confidential,” that is printed in the background of each page of a document.

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Open the Watermarks menu.

3.

Next to Mode, select the type of watermark to use. Select Watermark to print a semitransparent message. Select Overlay to print a message that is not transparent.

4.

Next to Pages, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only.

5.

Next to Text, select one of the standard messages, or select Custom and type a new message in the box.

6.

Select options for the remaining settings.

Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh

You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

Open the Layout menu.

4.

Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1,

2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).

5.

Next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.

6.

Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.

ENWW Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 69

Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing)

Use automatic duplex printing

1.

Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:

For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.

For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the tray.

2.

On the File menu, click Print.

3.

Open the Layout menu.

4.

Next to Two-Sided, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.

5.

Click Print.

Print on both sides manually

1.

Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:

For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.

For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the tray.

CAUTION:

To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m

2

(28-lb bond).

2.

On the File menu, click Print.

3.

On the Finishing menu, select Manually Print on 2nd Side.

4.

Click Print. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears on the computer screen before replacing the output stack in tray 1 for printing the second half.

5.

Go to the printer, and remove any blank paper that is in tray 1.

6.

Insert the printed stack face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first in tray 1. You

must print the second side from tray 1.

7.

If prompted, press the appropriate control-panel button to continue.

Set the stapling options

If a finishing device that has a stapler is installed, you can staple documents.

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Open the Finishing menu.

3.

In the Stapling Options drop-down list, select the stapling option that you want to use.

70 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW

Store jobs

You can store jobs on the product so you can print them at any time. You can share stored jobs with other users, or you can make them private.

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Open the Job Storage menu.

3.

In the Job Storage: drop-down list, select the type of stored job.

4.

For the Stored Job, Private Job, and Private Stored Job types of stored jobs, enter a name for the stored job in the box next to Job Name:.

Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.

Use Job Name + (1 - 99) appends a unique number to the end of the job name.

Replace Existing File overwrites the existing stored job with the new one.

5.

If you selected Stored Job or Private Job in step 3, type a 4-digit number in the box next to

PIN To Print (0000 - 9999). When other people attempt to print this job, the product prompts them to enter this PIN number.

Use the Services menu

If the product is connected to a network, use the Services menu to obtain product and supply-status information.

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Open the Services menu.

3.

To open the embedded Web server and perform a maintenance task, do the following:

a.

Select Device Maintenance.

b.

Select a task from the drop-down list.

c.

Click Launch.

4.

To go to various support Web sites for this device, do the following:

a.

Select Services on the Web.

b.

Select Internet Services, and select an option from the drop-down list.

c.

Click Go!.

ENWW Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 71

72 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW

5 Connectivity

USB connection

Auxiliary connection

Network configuration

ENWW 73

USB connection

This MFP supports a Type B Hi-speed USB 2.0 connection for printing.

Figure 5-1

USB connection

74 Chapter 5 Connectivity ENWW

Auxiliary connection

This MFP supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling output devices. The port is located on the back of the MFP.

Figure 5-2

Auxiliary connection

1

Auxiliary connection port (Jetlink)

ENWW Auxiliary connection 75

Network configuration

You might need to configure certain network parameters on the device. You can configure these parameters in the following locations:

Installation software

Device control panel

Embedded Web server

Management software (HP Web Jetadmin or HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh)

NOTE:

For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Embedded Web server on page 154

For more information on supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect

Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is installed.

This section contains the following information about configuring network parameters:

Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters

Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters

Disable network protocols (optional)

HP Jetdirect EIO print servers

Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters

If your network doesn't provide automatic IP addressing through DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or another method, you might need to enter the following parameters manually before you can print over the network:

IP address (4 bytes)

Subnet mask (4 bytes)

Default gateway (4 bytes)

Change the IP address

You can view the current IP address of the device from the control-panel Home screen by touching

Network Address .

Use the following procedure to change the IP address manually.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch Networking and I/O .

4.

Touch Embedded Jetdirect .

5.

Touch TCP/IP .

76 Chapter 5 Connectivity ENWW

6.

Touch IPV4 Settings .

7.

Touch Config Method .

8.

Touch Manual .

9.

Touch Save .

10.

Touch Manual Settings .

11.

Touch IP Address .

12.

Touch the IP Address text box.

13.

Use the touchscreen keypad to type the IP address.

14.

Touch OK .

15.

Touch Save .

Set the subnet mask

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch Networking and I/O .

4.

Touch Embedded Jetdirect .

5.

Touch TCP/IP .

6.

Touch IPV4 Settings .

7.

Touch Config Method .

8.

Touch Manual .

9.

Touch Save .

10.

Touch Manual Settings .

11.

Touch Subnet Mask .

12.

Touch the Subnet Mask text box.

13.

Use the touchscreen keypad to type the subnet mask.

14.

Touch OK .

15.

Touch Save .

Set the default gateway

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch Networking and I/O .

ENWW Network configuration 77

4.

Touch Embedded Jetdirect .

5.

Touch TCP/IP .

6.

Touch IPV4 Settings .

7.

Touch Config Method .

8.

Touch Manual .

9.

Touch Save .

10.

Touch Manual Settings .

11.

Touch Default Gateway .

12.

Touch the Default Gateway text box.

13.

Use the touchscreen keyboard to type the default gateway.

14.

Touch OK .

15.

Touch Save .

Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters

For information about configuring the device for a TCP/IPv6 network, see the HP Jetdirect Print

Server Administrator's Guide.

Disable network protocols (optional)

By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols has the following benefits:

It decreases device-generated network traffic.

It prevents unauthorized users from printing to the device.

It provides only pertinent information on the configuration page.

It allows the device control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages.

Disable IPX/SPX

NOTE:

Do not disable this protocol in Windows-based systems that print to the printer through IPX/

SPX.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch Networking and I/O .

4.

Touch Embedded Jetdirect .

5.

Touch IPX/SPX .

6.

Touch Enable .

78 Chapter 5 Connectivity ENWW

7.

Touch Off .

8.

Touch Save .

Disable AppleTalk

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch Networking and I/O .

4.

Touch Embedded Jetdirect .

5.

Touch AppleTalk .

6.

Touch Enable .

7.

Touch Off .

8.

Touch Save .

Disable DLC/LLC

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch Networking and I/O .

4.

Touch Embedded Jetdirect .

5.

Touch DLC/LLC .

6.

Touch Enable .

7.

Touch Off .

8.

Touch Save .

HP Jetdirect EIO print servers

HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) can be installed in the EIO slot. Supported networking features depend on the print server model. For available HP Jetdirect EIO print server models, go to http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirect .

NOTE:

Configure the card through the control panel, the printer installation software, or HP Web

Jetadmin. Refer to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for more information.

ENWW Network configuration 79

80 Chapter 5 Connectivity ENWW

6 Paper and print media

Understand paper and print media use

Supported paper and print media sizes

Custom paper sizes

Special paper or print media guidelines

Load paper and print media

Configure trays

Select the output bin

ENWW 81

Understand paper and print media use

This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:

Poor print quality

Increased jams

Premature wear on the product, requiring repair

For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laserjets or multiuse. Do not use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.

It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels, or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.

CAUTION:

Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.

82 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Supported paper and print media sizes

This product supports a number of paper sizes, and it adapts to various media.

NOTE:

To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver before printing.

Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes

Size Dimensions Tray 1, Letter

R, A4

Trays 2 and 3,

Letter R, A4

Tray 4, Letter

R, A4

Stapler /

Stacker lower bin

12 x 18

B4 (JIS)

RA3

B5 (JIS)

8k

16k

Letter

Legal

A4

Executive

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in.)

184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in.)

Executive

(JIS)

A3

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)

A5

A6

297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in.)

148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in.)

105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in.)

Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)

11 x 17 279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in.)

305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in.)

257 x 364 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in.)

305 x 430 mm (12.01 x 16.93 in.)

182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in.)

270 x390 mm (10.63 x 15.35 in.)

197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 in.)

Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards

Size Dimensions

Envelope #10 105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 in.)

Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in.)

Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.)

Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 in.)

Envelope

Monarch

Post Card

98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.)

100 x 148 mm (3.94 x 5.83 in.)

Tray 1, mailbox, stacker

Trays 2, 3, 4 Stapler

ENWW Supported paper and print media sizes 83

Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards (continued)

Size Dimensions Tray 1, mailbox, stacker

Double Post

Card

148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 in.)

Postcard (US) 88.9 x 139.7 mm (3.5 x 5.5 in.)

Postcard

(European)

105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in.)

Trays 2, 3, 4 Stapler

84 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Custom paper sizes

This product supports a variety of custom paper sizes. Supported custom sizes are sizes that are within the minimum- and maximum-size guidelines for the product but are not listed in the supported paper sizes table. When using a supported custom size, specify the custom size in the print driver, and load the paper in a tray that supports custom sizes.

ENWW Custom paper sizes 85

Special paper or print media guidelines

This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to obtain the best print results.

CAUTION:

HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper not designed for this technology could damage your printer.

Media type

Envelopes

Labels

Transparencies

Letterhead or preprinted forms

Heavy paper

Glossy or coated paper

Do

Store envelopes flat.

Use envelopes where the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.

Use peel-off adhesive strips that are approved for use in laser printers.

Do not

Do not use envelopes that are wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or otherwise damaged.

Do not use envelopes that have clasps, snaps, windows, or coated linings.

Do not use self-stick adhesives or other synthetic materials.

Do not use labels that have wrinkles or bubbles, or are damaged.

Do not print partial sheets of labels.

Use only labels that have no exposed backing between them.

Use Labels that lie flat.

Use only full sheets of labels.

Use only transparencies that are approved for use in laser printers.

Place transparencies on a flat surface after removing them from the product.

Use only letterhead or forms approved for use in laser printers.

Use only heavy paper that is approved for use in laser printers and meets the weight specifications for this product.

Use only glossy or coated paper that is approved for use in laser printers.

Do not use transparent print media not approved for laser printers.

Do not use raised or metallic letterhead.

Do not use paper that is heavier than the recommended media specification for this product unless it is HP paper that has been approved for use in this product.

Do not use glossy or coated paper designed for use in inkjet products.

86 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Load paper and print media

This section contains information about loading standard- and custom-size media into the four input trays.

CAUTION:

To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from tray 1 or open tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4 while printing or copying from that tray. To avoid damaging the MFP, print labels, envelopes, and transparencies from tray 1 only. Send labels, envelopes, and transparencies to the upper bin. Print on only one side of labels, envelopes, and transparencies.

Load tray 1

Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes. For more information about supported media, see

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83

.

1.

Open tray 1.

Figure 6-1

Load tray 1 (1 of 3)

2.

Load paper according to size and finishing options.

Figure 6-2

Load tray 1 (2 of 3)

CAUTION:

To avoid jams, print sheets of labels one sheet at a time.

3.

Adjust the paper guides so they lightly touch the paper stack, but do not bend the paper.

Figure 6-3

Load tray 1 (3 of 3)

ENWW

4.

Make sure the paper fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level indicators.

Load paper and print media 87

NOTE:

If printing on A3- or 11 x 17-size paper, or other long media, also pull out the tray extension until it stops.

Load trays 2, 3, and 4

Trays 2 and 3 hold up to 500 sheets of standard media. Tray 4 holds up to 2,000 sheets of standard media. For information about paper specifications, see

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

Load detectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4

Follow this procedure to load detectable standard-size paper in the tray. The following are the detectable sizes, which are marked inside the tray:

A4

Letter

A3

Legal

Executive

11 x 17

B4 (JIS)

B5 (JIS)

A4-Rotated

Letter-Rotated

CAUTION:

To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.

1.

Open the tray until it stops.

Figure 6-4

Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (1 of 6)

88 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

ENWW

2.

Adjust the left (Y) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and set the guide to the correct paper size.

Figure 6-5

Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (2 of 6)

3.

Adjust the front (X) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and set the guide to the correct paper size.

Figure 6-6

Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (3 of 6)

4.

Load (orient) the paper according to size.

Figure 6-7

Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (4 of 6)

5.

Set the Custom/Standard switch to Standard.

Figure 6-8

Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (5 of 6)

Load paper and print media 89

6.

Close the tray. The MFP control panel might show the tray media type and size. If the configuration is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel. If the configuration is correct, touch OK .

Figure 6-9

Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (6 of 6)

Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4

Follow this procedure to load undetectable standard-size paper in the tray. The following are the undetectable sizes:

8K

16K

Statement

JIS Executive

8.5 x 13 (216 x 330 mm).

CAUTION:

To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.

1.

Open the tray until it stops.

Figure 6-10

Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (1 of 6)

2.

Press the tab on the front paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.

3.

Press the tab on the left paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.

90 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

ENWW

4.

Load (orient) the paper according to size.

Figure 6-11

Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (2 of 6)

5.

Adjust the left paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently touches the paper

Figure 6-12

Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (3 of 6)

6.

Adjust the front paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently touches the paper.

Figure 6-13

Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (4 of 6)

NOTE:

When loading tray 4, make sure that the paper guide lock is in the up position.

7.

Set the Custom/Standard switch to Custom.

Figure 6-14

Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (5 of 6)

Load paper and print media 91

8.

Close the tray. The MFP control panel might show the tray media type and size. If the configuration is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel. If the configuration is correct, touch OK .

Figure 6-15

Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (6 of 6)

Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4

Use the following procedure to load custom-size paper in the tray.

CAUTION:

To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.

1.

Open the tray until it stops.

Figure 6-16

Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (1 of 6)

2.

Press the tab on the front (X) paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.

3.

Press the tab on the left (Y) paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.

4.

Load (orient) the paper according to size.

Figure 6-17

Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (2 of 6)

92 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

ENWW

5.

Set the Custom/Standard switch to Custom.

Figure 6-18

Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (3 of 6)

6.

Adjust the left (Y) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently touches the paper

Figure 6-19

Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (4 of 6)

7.

Adjust the front (X) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently touches the paper.

Figure 6-20

Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (5 of 6)

8.

Note the orientation of the paper, as well as the value of the X dimension and the Y dimension.

The X and Y dimensions are marked in the tray. You will need this information for a later step.

NOTE:

When loading tray 4, make sure that the paper guide lock is in the up position.

9.

Close the tray. The MFP control panel might show the tray media type and size. If the configuration is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel. If the configuration is correct, touch OK .

Figure 6-21

Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (6 of 6)

Load paper and print media 93

Configure trays

The MFP might automatically prompt you to configure a tray for type and size when you load media into the tray.

The following message appears on the control panel: Tray <X> [type] [size] To change size or

type, touch “Modify”. To accept, touch “OK”..

NOTE:

The prompt does not appear if you are printing from tray 1 and tray 1 is configured for Any

Size and Any Type.

NOTE:

If you have used other HP LaserJet printer models, you might be accustomed to configuring tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On the HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP, setting tray 1 size and type to Any Size is equivalent to First mode. Setting size or type for tray 1 to a setting other than Any Size is equivalent to Cassette mode.

Configure a tray when loading media

1.

Load media in the tray. Close the tray if you are using tray 2, 3, or 4.

2.

If the tray configuration message appears, touch OK to accept the detected size, or touch

Modify to choose a different paper size.

3.

If modifying the tray configuration, select the size.

NOTE:

The MFP automatically detects most media sizes in trays 2, 3, and 4.

4.

If modifying the tray configuration, select the paper type.

5.

Touch Exit .

Configure a tray by using the Supplies Status button on the touchscreen

You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the MFP.

1.

Scroll to and touch Supplies Status .

2.

Touch the desired tray.

3.

Touch Modify .

4.

Select the size and type. If you select a custom type, use the numeric keypad to set the X dimension and the Y dimension, and then touch OK .

5.

Touch OK .

6.

Touch OK again.

Select the media by source, type, or size

In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the

MFP automatically selects a tray using the default settings.

94 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Source

To print by Source select a specific tray from MFP to pull from. The MFP tries to print from this tray, no matter what type or size is loaded. If you select a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not match your print job, the MFP does not print automatically. Instead, it waits for you to load the tray with the type or size of print media for your print job. If you load the tray, the MFP begins printing.

Type and Size

Printing by Type or Size means that you want the MFP to pull from the tray that is loaded with the correct type and size of media. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays and helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for letterhead and you select plain paper, the MFP will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull from a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the MFP control panel. Selecting media by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality.

Always print by Type for special print media, such as labels or transparencies. Print by Size for envelopes, if possible.

To print by Type or Size, select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program.

If you often print on a certain type or size of media, configure a tray for that type or size. Then, when you select that type or size as you print a job, the MFP pulls media from the tray that is configured for that type or size.

ENWW Configure trays 95

Select the output bin

The MFP has at least two output bin locations: the ADF output bin (1) and an output bin on the output device.

Figure 6-22

Output bins

It is recommended that you select an output location through the software program or printer driver.

Stacker or stapler/stacker output bins

If you choose the 3,000-sheet stacker or 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker, the output bins are the upper bin (2) (face up) and the lower bin (3) (face down).

The upper bin (face-up) (2) is the top bin on the stacker or stapler/stacker. This bin holds up to 100 sheets of paper in face-up order as they exit the MFP. A sensor causes the product to stop when the bin is full. Product operation continues when you empty or reduce the amount of paper in the bin.

The lower bin (face-down) (3) is the lower bin on the stacker or stapler/stacker. This bin holds up to

3,000 sheets of paper and allows you to stack or staple jobs. This bin is the default output bin.

8-bin mailbox output bins

If you choose the 8-bin mailbox, the output bins are the upper bin and the eight face-down bins.

The upper bin (4) holds up to 125 sheets of paper.

The network administrator can assign the eight bins (5) to individual users or workgroups. Each bin can stack up to 250 sheets of paper.

Multifunction finisher output bins

If you choose the multifunction finisher, the output bins are the upper bin ( 6) and the lower booklet bin (7).

The upper bin (6) is the top bin on the multifunction finisher. This bin provides 1,000 sheets of stacking capacity and can offset each job as it is stacked, delivering unstapled jobs face up or face down. This bin also provides stapling for up to 50 sheets of paper per document. The upper bin is the default output bin when the multifunction finisher is attached.

The lower booklet bin (7) is the lower bin on the multifunction finisher. This bin provides folding and saddle stitching of booklets for up to 10 sheets of paper.

96 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Select an output location

Printing

It is recommended that you select an output location (bin) through your program or driver. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver, set the default output location from the

MFP control panel.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Default Job Options .

3.

Touch Default Print Options .

4.

Touch Output Bin .

5.

Touch the desired output bin.

Copying

You can set and override the current default output location (bin) from the MFP control panel for copy jobs:

1.

Scroll to and touch Copy .

2.

Touch More Options .

3.

Touch Output Bin .

4.

Touch the desired output bin.

To set the default output bin for copy jobs:

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Default Job Options .

3.

Touch Default Copy Options .

4.

Touch Output Bin .

5.

Touch the desired output bin.

ENWW Select the output bin 97

98 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

7 Print tasks

Media type and tray loading

Use features in the Windows printer driver

Staple documents

Cancel a print job

Print on envelopes

Job storage features for print

ENWW 99

Media type and tray loading

Minimum media dimensions are 98 x 191 mm (3.8 x 7.5 inches).

Maximum media dimensions are 312 x 470 mm (12.3 x 18.5 inches).

Table 7-1 Tray 1 media information

Media type Media specifications Media quantity Driver settings

Paper and cardstock, standard sizes

Envelopes

Labels

Transparencies

Heavy

Glossy

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 216 g/m

2

(58 lb) bond

Two-sided printing: 64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to

199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 216 g/m

2

(58 lb) bond

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 216 g/m 2 (58 lb) bond

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 216 g/m 2 (58 lb) bond

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 216 g/m 2 (58 lb) bond

Two-sided printing: 64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to

199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 216 g/m 2 (58 lb) bond

Two-sided printing: 64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to

199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6

inch)

Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond.

Up to 10 envelopes

Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6

inch)

Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6

inch)

Plain or unspecified

Envelope

Labels

Transparencies

Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 in.)

Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy

Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 in.)

Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy

Paper orientation

N/A

Short edge leading, flap on right side facing up

Side to be printed on facing up

Side to be printed on facing up

Side to be printed on facing up

Side to be printed on facing up

100 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

Table 7-2 Tray 2 and 3 media information

Media type Media specifications Media quantity

Paper and cardstock

64 g/m

2

(17 lb) bond to 199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

Up to 500 sheets

Heavy

Glossy

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 199 g/m

2

(53 lb) bond

Up to 500 sheets

Up to 500 sheets

Driver settings

Plain or unspecified

Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy

Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy

Paper orientation

N/A

Side to be printed on facing up

Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy

Side to be printed on facing up

Table 7-3 Tray 4 media information

Media type Media specifications Media quantity

Paper and cardstock Up to 2000 sheets

Heavy

Glossy

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

64 g/m 2 (17 lb) bond to 199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

64 g/m

2

(17 lb) bond to 199 g/m 2 (53 lb) bond

Up to 2000 sheets

Up to 2000 sheets

Driver settings

Plain or unspecified

Paper orientation

N/A

Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy

Side to be printed on facing up

Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy

Side to be printed on facing up

ENWW Media type and tray loading 101

Use features in the Windows printer driver

Open the printer driver

How do I

Open the printer driver

Get help for any printing option

Steps to perform

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

Select the printer, and then click Properties or Preferences.

Click the ? symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver, and then click any item in the printer driver. A pop-up message displays that provides information about the item.

Or, click Help to open the online Help.

Use printing shortcuts

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Printing Shortcuts tab.

NOTE:

In previous HP printer drivers, this feature was called Quick Sets.

How do I

Use a printing shortcut

Create a custom printing shortcut

Steps to perform

Select one of the shortcuts, and then click OK to print the job with the predefined settings.

a) Select an existing shortcut as a base. b) Select the print options for the new shortcut. c) Click Save As, type a name for the shortcut, and click OK.

Set paper and quality options

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Paper/Quality tab.

102 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

How do I

Select a page size

Select a custom page size

Select a paper source

Select a paper type

Print covers on different paper

Print the first or last page on different paper

Adjust the resolution of printed images

Select draft-quality printing

Steps to perform

Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.

a) Click Custom. The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens. b) Type a name for the custom size, specify the dimensions, and click OK.

Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.

Select a type from the Paper type drop-down list.

a) In the Special pages area, click Covers or Print pages

on different paper, and then click Settings. b) Select an option to print a blank or preprinted front cover, back cover, or both. Or, select an option to print the first or last page on different paper. c) Select options from the Paper source and Paper type drop-down lists, and then click Add. d) Click

OK.

In the Print Quality area, select an option from the first drop down list. See the printer-driver online Help for information about each of the available options.

In the Print Quality area, click EconoMode.

Set document effects

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Effects tab.

How do I

Scale a page to fit on a selected paper size

Scale a page to be a percent of the actual size

Print a watermark

Add or edit watermarks

NOTE:

The printer driver must be stored on your computer for this to work.

Steps to perform

Click Print document on, and then select a size from the drop-down list.

Click % of actual size, and then type the percent or adjust the slider bar.

a) Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.

b) To print the watermark on the first page only, click First

page only. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.

a) In the Watermarks area, click Edit. The Watermark

Details dialog box opens. b) Specify the settings for the watermark, and then click OK.

Set document finishing options

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Finishing tab.

How do I

Print on both sides (Duplex)

Print a booklet

Steps to perform

Click Print on both sides. If you will bind the document along the top edge, click Flip pages up.

a) Click Print on both sides. b) In the Booklet layout dropdown list, click Left binding or Right binding. The Pages

per sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet.

ENWW Use features in the Windows printer driver 103

How do I

Print multiple pages per sheet

Select page orientation

Steps to perform

a) Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per

sheet drop-down list. b) Select the correct options for Print

page borders, Page order, and Orientation.

a) In the Orientation area, click Portrait or Landscape.

b) To print the page image upside down, click Rotate by

180 degrees.

Set product output options

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Output tab.

NOTE:

The options that are available on this tab depend on the finishing device that you are using.

How do I

Select staple options

Print a separator page between copies

Select an output bin

Steps to perform

Select a stapling option from the Staple drop-down list.

a) Click Job Separator. The Separator Page Details dialog box opens. b) In the Separator Page Details drop-down list, click Separator page, and then select a paper source and a paper type. c) To print job-related data on the separator page, click any or all of the check boxes. Click OK.

Select an output bin from the Bin drop-down list.

Set job storage options

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Job Storage tab.

How do I Steps to perform

Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies In the Job Storage Mode area, click Proof and Hold. The product prints the first copy only. A message appears on the product control panel that prompts you to print the rest of the copies.

Temporarily store a private job on the product and print it later a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Personal Job. b) In the Make Job Private area, enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Temporarily store a job on the product

NOTE:

These jobs are deleted if the product is turned off.

Permanently store a job on the product

Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who tries to print it must provide a PIN

Receive notification when someone prints a stored job

In the Job Storage Mode area, click Quick Copy. One copy of the job is printed immediately, but you can print more copies from the product control panel.

In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job.

a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job. b) In the Make Job Private area, click PIN to print, and then enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

In the Job Notification Options area, click Display Job ID

when printing.

104 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

How do I

Set the user name for a stored job

Specify a name for the stored job

Steps to perform

In the User Name area, click User name to use the

Windows default user name. To provide a different user name, click Custom and type the name.

a) In the Job Name area, click Automatic to use the default job name. To specify a job name, click Custom and type the name. b) Select an option from the If job name exists dropdown list. Select Use Job Name + (1-99) to add a number to the end of the existing name, or select Replace Existing

File to overwrite a job that already has that name.

Obtain support and product-status information

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Services tab.

How do I Steps to perform

Obtain support information for the product and order supplies online

In the Internet Services drop-down list, select a support option, and click Go!

Check the status of the product, including the level of supplies Click the Device and Supplies Status icon. The Device

Status page of the HP embedded Web server opens.

Set advanced printing options

To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Advanced tab.

ENWW Use features in the Windows printer driver 105

How do I Steps to perform

Select advanced printing options

Change the number of copies that are printed

NOTE:

If the software program that you are using does not provide a way to print a particular number of copies, you can change the number of copies in the driver.

Changing this setting affects the number of copies for all print jobs. After your job has printed, restore this setting to the original value.

Print colored text as black rather than as shades of gray

Load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for every job, whether printing on one or both sides of the page

Change the order in which pages are printed

In any of the sections, click a current setting to activate a drop-down list so you can change the setting.

Open the Paper/Output section, and then enter the number of copies to print. If you select 2 or more copies, you can select the option to collate the pages.

a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the

Printer Features section. b) In the Print All Text as Black drop-down list, select Enabled.

a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the

Printer Features section. b) In the Alternative Letterhead

Mode drop-down list, select On. c) At the product, load the paper the same way you would for printing on both sides.

a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the

Layout Options section. b) In the Page Order drop-down list, select Front to Back to print the pages in the same order as they are in the document, or select Back to Front to print the pages in the reverse order.

106 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

Staple documents

NOTE:

Stapling features are only available if the stapler/stacker or multifunction finisher are attached to the MFP.

Set the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs

You can usually select the stapler in your software program or printer driver, although some options

might be available only in the printer driver. See Change printer-driver settings for Windows on page 55

for more information. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver. If the stapler cannot be selected in the program or printer driver, it can be selected using the

MFP control panel.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Device Behavior .

3.

Scroll to and touch Stapler/Stacker or Multifunct. Finisher .

4.

Touch Staple .

5.

Touch the staple option you want to use.

NOTE:

Selecting the stapler at the printer control panel changes the default setting to Staple . It is possible that all print jobs will be stapled. However, settings that are changed in the printer driver override settings that are changed at the control panel.

Set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs

NOTE:

The following procedure changes the default setting for all copy jobs.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Default Job Options .

3.

Touch Default Copy Options .

4.

Touch Staple/Collate .

5.

Touch Staple .

6.

Touch the staple option you want to use.

Set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job

NOTE:

The following procedure sets the stapling option for only the current copy job.

1.

Touch Copy .

2.

Touch Staple/Collate .

3.

Touch the staple option you want to use.

ENWW Staple documents 107

Configure the device to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty

You can specify whether the MFP stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues printing but does not staple the jobs.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Scroll to and touch Device Behavior .

3.

Scroll to and touch Stapler/Stacker or Multifunct. Finisher .

4.

Touch Staples Out .

5.

Touch the option that you want to use:

Select Stop to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced.

Select Continue to continue printing jobs without stapling them.

Load staples

Load staples if the MFP control-panel display prompts you with a Stapler Low On Staples or Order

staple cartridge message (the stapler has fewer than 20 usable staples left), or when it prompts you with a Replace Stapler Cartridge or STAPLER OUT OF STAPLES message (the stapler is empty, or the remaining staples cannot be used).

The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The printer driver can be configured to disable the staple option when the stapler cartridge is empty.

Load staples in the stapler/stacker

1.

Move the stapler/stacker away from the MFP.

Figure 7-1

Load staples in the stapler/stacker (1 of 5)

2.

Open the stapler unit door.

Figure 7-2

Load staples in the stapler/stacker (2 of 5)

108 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

3.

On the empty staple cartridge, pull up on the green tab, and then pull the empty cartridge out.

Figure 7-3

Load staples in the stapler/stacker (3 of 5)

4.

Insert the new staple cartridge, and push down on the green tab so that the cartridge locks into place.

Figure 7-4

Load staples in the stapler/stacker (4 of 5)

5.

Close the stapler unit door and push the stapler/stacker back into place.

Figure 7-5

Load staples in the stapler/stacker (5 of 5)

Load staples in the multifunction finisher

1.

Open the stapler unit door.

Figure 7-6

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (1 of 8)

ENWW Staple documents 109

2.

Slide the stapler unit toward you.

Figure 7-7

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (2 of 8)

3.

Turn the large green knob until the blue dot appears in the window of the stapler unit.

Figure 7-8

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (3 of 8)

4.

Turn the small green knob at the top of the stapler unit clockwise until the staple cartridge moves to the left of the stapler unit.

Figure 7-9

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (4 of 8)

CAUTION:

The blue dot must appear in the window of the stapler unit before you remove the staple cartridge. If you try to remove the staple cartridge before the blue dot appears in the window, you could damage the finisher.

5.

On the empty staple cartridge, squeeze the tabs together and pull the empty cartridge out.

Figure 7-10

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (5 of 8)

110 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

6.

Insert the new staple cartridge so that it locks into place.

Figure 7-11

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (6 of 8)

7.

Slide the stapler unit into the finisher.

Figure 7-12

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (7 of 8)

8.

Close the stapler unit door and realign the multifunction finisher against the MFP.

Figure 7-13

Load staples in the multifunction finisher (8 of 8)

ENWW Staple documents 111

Cancel a print job

You can stop a print request by using the control panel or by using the software program. For instructions about how to stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for the specific network software.

NOTE:

It can take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.

Stop the current print job from the control panel

1.

Press Stop on the control panel.

2.

On the touchscreen, on the Device Has Been Paused screen, touch Cancel current job.

NOTE:

If the print job is too far into the printing process, you might not have the option to cancel it.

Stop the current print job from the software program

A dialog box will appear briefly on the screen, giving you the option to cancel the print job.

If several requests have been sent to the device through your software, they might be waiting in a print queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the software documentation for specific instructions about canceling a print request from the computer.

If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows 2000 or XP), delete the print job there.

Click Start and then click Printers. Double-click the device icon to open the print spooler. Select the print job that you want to cancel, and then press Delete . If the print job is not cancelled, you might need to shut down and restart the computer.

112 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

Print on envelopes

Envelopes must be printed from tray 1, which holds up to 10 envelopes. Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope. Always test a few sample envelopes before purchasing a large quantity. For envelope specifications, see

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83

or go to www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp .

CAUTION:

Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or other synthetic materials can severely damage the MFP. Do not use envelopes with pressuresensitive adhesive.

Use the following basic steps to print on envelopes.

1.

Load the envelopes in tray 1.

2.

Change the fuser levers.

3.

Send the print job.

Load envelopes in tray 1

1.

Open tray 1, but do not pull out the extension. (Most envelopes feed best without the extension.

However, oversize envelopes might need the extension.)

Figure 7-14

Load envelopes in tray 1 (1 of 3)

2.

Load up to 10 envelopes in the center of tray 1 with the side to be printed on facing up, and the return-address end toward the MFP. Slide the envelopes into the MFP as far as they will go without forcing them.

Figure 7-15

Load envelopes in tray 1 (2 of 3)

ENWW Print on envelopes 113

3.

Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure that the envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides.

Figure 7-16

Load envelopes in tray 1 (3 of 3)

4.

Change the fuser levers (see Change the fuser levers on page 114 ).

Change the fuser levers

1.

Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.

Figure 7-17

Change the fuser levers (1 of 4)

2.

Open the left door.

Figure 7-18

Change the fuser levers (2 of 4)

WARNING!

Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.

114 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

3.

Locate and lift up the two blue levers.

NOTE:

Return the fuser levers to the down position after printing on envelopes.

CAUTION:

Failure to return levers to the down position for standard paper types can result in poor print quality.

Figure 7-19

Change the fuser levers (3 of 4)

4.

Close the left door.

Figure 7-20

Change the fuser levers (4 of 4)

5.

Push the output device back into place.

Print on envelopes from a program

1.

Load envelopes into tray 1.

2.

In your program or in the printer driver, select tray 1 as the source.

3.

Set the appropriate envelope size and type. For envelope specifications, see

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83

.

4.

If your program does not automatically format for an envelope, specify “Portrait” for page orientation.

CAUTION:

To avoid a jam, do not remove or insert an envelope after you begin printing.

5.

Set margins to within 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edge of the envelope. For best print quality, set margins for a return and mailing address (typical address margins for a Commercial #10 or DL envelope are offered). Avoid printing over the area where the three back flaps meet on the back of an envelope.

6.

Select the left bin as the output location.

7.

When finished printing on envelopes, return the fuser levers to the down position.

CAUTION:

Failure to return levers to the down position for standard paper types can result in poor print quality.

ENWW Print on envelopes 115

Job storage features for print

The following job-storage features are available for print jobs:

Proof and hold jobs: This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then print the additional copies.

Personal jobs: When you send a private job to the device, the job does not print until you provide the required personal identification number (PIN) at the control panel.

Stored jobs: You can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the device and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a

PIN.

Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the computer. See the specific section for the type of job that you want to create.

CAUTION:

If you turn off the device, all proof-and-hold and personal jobs are deleted.

Gain access to the job storage features for print

For Windows

1.

On the File menu, click Print.

2.

Click Properties, and then click the Job Storage tab.

3.

Select the job storage mode that you want.

For Macintosh

In newer drivers: Select Job Storage in the pull-down menu in the Print dialog box. In older drivers, select Printer Specific Options.

Use the proof and hold feature

The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job.

To permanently store the job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed for something else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.

Create a proof and hold job

CAUTION:

If the device needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs, the device deletes other stored proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Stored Job option in the driver instead of the Proof and Hold option.

In the driver, select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name.

The device prints one copy of the job for you to proof.

116 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job

At the device control panel, use the following procedure to print the remaining copies of a job held on the hard disk.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.

5.

Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print. Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.

Delete a proof and hold job

When you send a proof and hold job, the device automatically deletes your previous proof and hold job.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.

5.

Touch Delete .

6.

Touch Yes .

Use the personal job feature

Use the personal printing feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it. First, set a 4digit PIN by typing the PIN in the printer driver. The PIN is sent to the device as part of the print job.

After you have sent the print job to the device, you must use the PIN to print the job.

Create a personal job

To specify that a job is personal, in the driver, select the Personal Job option, type a user name and job name, and then type a four-digit PIN into the Make Job Private field. The job will not print until you enter the PIN at the device control panel.

Print a personal job

You can print a personal job at the control panel after the job has been sent to the device.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the personal job that you want to print.

NOTE:

A personal job will have a [lock symbol] next to it.

ENWW Job storage features for print 117

5.

Touch the PIN field.

6.

Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.

7.

Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.

8.

Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.

Delete a personal job

A personal job is automatically deleted from the device hard disk after you release it for printing. If you want to delete the job without printing it, use this procedure.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the personal job that you want to delete.

NOTE:

A personal job will have a [lock symbol] next to it.)

5.

Touch the PIN field.

6.

Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK .

7.

Touch Delete .

Use the QuickCopy feature

The QuickCopy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on the device hard disk. Additional copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off in the printer driver.

The default number of different QuickCopy jobs that can be stored on the device is 32. At the control panel, you can set a different default number. See

Navigate the Administration menu on page 15 .

Create a QuickCopy job

CAUTION:

If the device needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs, the device deletes other stored QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option in the driver instead of the QuickCopy option.

In the driver, select the QuickCopy option, and then type a user name and a job name.

When you send the job to print, the device prints the number of copies that you set in the driver. To print more quick copies at the device control panel, see

Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job on page 119 .

118 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job

This section describes how to print additional copies of a job stored on the device hard disk at the control panel.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.

5.

Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.

6.

Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.

Delete a QuickCopy job

Delete a QuickCopy job at the device control panel when you no longer need it. If the device requires additional space to store new QuickCopy jobs, the device automatically deletes other stored

QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job.

NOTE:

Stored QuickCopy jobs can be deleted at the control panel or in HP Web Jetadmin.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.

5.

Touch Delete .

6.

Touch Yes .

Use the stored job feature

You can save a print job to the device hard disk without printing it. You can then print the job at any time at the device control panel. For example, you might want to download a personnel form, calendar, time sheet, or accounting form that other users can print when they need it.

Create a stored print job

In the driver, select the Stored Job option, and then type a user name and job name. The job does not print until someone requests it at the device control panel.

Print a stored print job

At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the device hard disk.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.

ENWW Job storage features for print 119

4.

Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to print.

5.

Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.

6.

Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.

7.

Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.

If the file has (lock symbol) next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN.

Delete a stored print job

Jobs stored on the device hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to delete.

5.

Touch Delete .

6.

Touch Yes .

If the file has (lock symbol) next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete it.

120 Chapter 7 Print tasks ENWW

8 Copy

This device can function as a standalone, walk-up copier. It is not necessary to install the printing system software on the computer; you can adjust the copy settings at the control panel. You can also copy originals by using either the document feeder or the scanner glass.

This chapter provides information about how to make copies and how to change copy settings, including the following topics:

Use the Copy screen

Set the default copy options

Basic copy instructions

Adjust the copy settings

Copy two-sided documents

Copy mixed-size originals

Change the copy-collation setting

Copy photos and books

Combine copy jobs by using Job Build

Cancel a copy job

Job storage features for copy

It is recommended that you review the basic control-panel information before using the device

copying functions. See Use the control panel on page 12 for more information.

ENWW 121

Use the Copy screen

From the Home screen, touch Copy to view the Copy screen. Note that only the first six copy features are immediately visible. In order to view additional copy features, touch More Options .

Figure 8-1

Copy screen

122 Chapter 8 Copy ENWW

Set the default copy options

You can use the administration menu to establish default settings that apply to all copy jobs. If necessary, you can override most settings for an individual job. After that job is complete, the device returns to the default settings.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Default Job Options , and then touch Default Copy Options .

3.

Several options are available. You can configure defaults for all options, or for only some options.

For information about each option, see

Adjust the copy settings on page 125

. The built-in Help system also provides an explanation of each option. Touch the Help button ( ) in the upperright corner of the screen.

4.

To exit the administration menu, touch the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen.

ENWW Set the default copy options 123

Basic copy instructions

This section provides the basic instructions for copying.

Copy from the scanner glass

Use the scanner glass to make as many as 999 copies of small, lightweight media or heavy media.

This includes media such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, old documents, worn documents, and books.

Place original documents face-down on the glass. Align the corner of the original with the upper-left corner of the glass.

To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select the number of copies, and press Start . To use customized settings, touch Copy . Specify the settings, and then press Start . For more information about using customized settings, see

Adjust the copy settings on page 125 .

Copy from the document feeder

Use the document feeder to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages

(depending on the thickness of the pages). Place the document into the document feeder with the pages facing down.

To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select the number of copies, and press Start . To use customized settings, touch Copy . Specify the settings, and then press Start . For more information about using customized settings, see

Adjust the copy settings on page 125 .

124 Chapter 8 Copy ENWW

Adjust the copy settings

The device offers several features so you can optimize copied output. These features are all available on the Copy screen.

The Copy screen consists of several pages. From the first page, touch More Options to go to the next page. Then touch the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to other pages.

For details about how to use an option, touch the option, and then touch the help ( ) button in the upper-right corner of the screen. The following table provides an overview of the copy options.

NOTE:

Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, some of these options might not appear. The options in the table are listed in the order in which they can appear.

Option name

Sides

Reduce/Enlarge

Staple/Collate or Collate

Paper Selection

Image Adjustment

Content Orientation

Output Bin

Optimize Text/Picture

Pages per Sheet

Original Size

Booklet Format

Edge-To-Edge

Job Build

Description

Use this feature to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides.

Use this feature to reduce or enlarge the copied image on the page.

If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker or HP Multifunction Finisher is attached, the Staple/Collate option is available. Use this feature to set up options for stapling and assembling the pages in sets of copies.

If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker or HP Multifunction Finisher is not attached, the Collate option is available. Use this feature to assemble each set of copied pages in the same order as the original document.

Use this feature to select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use.

Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy. For example, you can adjust the darkness and sharpness, and you can use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.

Use this feature to specify the way the content of the original page is placed on the page: portrait or landscape.

Use this feature to select an output bin for the copies.

Use this feature to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text or printed pictures, or you can manually adjust the values.

Use this feature to copy multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.

Use this feature to describe the page size of the original document.

Use this feature to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to form a booklet.

Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/

Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies.

Use this feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job. Also use this feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time.

ENWW Adjust the copy settings 125

Copy two-sided documents

Two-sided documents can be copied manually or automatically.

Copying two-sided documents manually

Copies resulting from this procedure are printed on one side, and need to be hand-collated.

1.

Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder input tray with the first page facing down, and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.

2.

Touch Start Copy . The odd-numbered pages are copied and printed.

3.

Remove the stack from the document feeder output tray and reload the stack with the last page facing down, and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.

4.

Touch Start Copy . The even-numbered pages are copied and printed.

5.

Collate the odd- and even-numbered printed copies.

Figure 8-2

Collate copies

Copy two-sided documents automatically

The default copy setting is one-sided to one-sided. Use the following procedures to change the setting so you can copy from or to documents that are two-sided.

Make two-sided copies from one-sided documents

1.

Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing down, and with the top of the page leading.

2.

On the control panel, touch Copy .

3.

Touch Sides .

4.

Touch 1-sided original, 2-sided output.

5.

Touch OK .

6.

Touch Start Copy .

Make two-sided copies from two-sided documents

1.

Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing down, and with the top of the page leading.

2.

On the control panel, touch Copy .

126 Chapter 8 Copy ENWW

3.

Touch Sides .

4.

Touch 2-sided original, 2-sided output.

5.

Touch OK .

6.

Touch Start Copy .

Make one-sided copies from two-sided documents

1.

Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing down, and with the top of the page leading.

2.

On the control panel, touch Copy .

3.

Touch Sides .

4.

Touch 2-sided original, 1-sided output.

5.

Touch OK .

6.

Touch Start Copy .

ENWW Copy two-sided documents 127

Copy mixed-size originals

You can copy original documents that are printed on different sizes of paper as long as the sheets of paper have one common dimension. For example, you could combine letter and legal sizes, or you could combine A4 and A5 sizes.

1.

Arrange the sheets in the original document so they all have the same width.

2.

Place the sheets face-down into the document feeder, and adjust both paper guides against the document.

3.

From the Home screen, touch Copy .

4.

Touch Original Size .

NOTE:

If this option is not on the first screen, touch More Options until the option appears.

5.

Select Mixed Ltr/Lgl , and then touch OK .

6.

Touch Start Copy .

128 Chapter 8 Copy ENWW

Change the copy-collation setting

You can set the device to automatically collate multiple copies into sets. For example, if you are making two copies of three pages and the automatic collation is on, the pages print in this order:

1,2,3,1,2,3. If automatic collation is off, the pages print in this order: 1,1,2,2,3,3.

To use the automatic collation, the original document size must fit into the memory. If it does not, the device makes only one copy and a message appears notifying you of the change. If that happens, use one of the following methods to finish the job:

Split the job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.

Make only one copy of the document at a time.

Turn off the automatic collation.

The collation setting you select is in effect for all copies until you change the setting. The default setting for automatic copy collation is On .

1.

On the control panel, touch Copy .

2.

Touch Staple/Collate or Collate .

3.

Touch Off .

4.

Touch OK .

ENWW Change the copy-collation setting 129

Copy photos and books

Copy a photo

NOTE:

Photos should be copied from the flatbed scanner, not from the document feeder.

1.

Lift the lid and place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture-side down and the upperleft corner of the photo in the upper-left corner of the glass.

2.

Gently close the lid.

3.

Touch Start Copy .

Copy a book

1.

Place the book face down on the glass with the top edge toward the rear of the glass. Align the book spine with the book icon along the top edge of the glass.

2.

Touch Copy .

3.

Scroll to and touch Book Copy .

4.

Touch Book Copy On and then touch OK .

5.

Select the number of copies to make and adjust other settings as needed.

6.

Touch Start Copy, or press the Start button on the control panel.

7.

Select which pages of the book should be copied:

Copy both pages copies the images on both the left and right side of the spine

Skip left page copies the image on the right side of the spine only

Skip right page copies the image on the left side of the spine only

8.

Touch Scan .

9.

After the last page is scanned, touch Finish .

130 Chapter 8 Copy ENWW

Combine copy jobs by using Job Build

Use the Job Build feature to build a single copy job from multiple scans. You can use either the document feeder or the scanner glass. The settings for the first scan are used for subsequent scans.

1.

Touch Copy .

2.

Scroll to and touch Job Build .

3.

Touch Job Build On .

4.

Touch OK .

5.

If necessary, select the desired copy options.

6.

Touch Start Copy . After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.

7.

If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then touch Scan .

The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. The product will begin printing copies when it has enough information to begin. Touch Finished to finish printing the copies.

NOTE:

In Job Build, if you scan the first page of a document by using the document feeder, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using the document feeder. If you scan the first page of a document by using the scanner glass, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using the scanner glass.

ENWW Combine copy jobs by using Job Build 131

Cancel a copy job

To cancel the copy job that is currently running, touch Stop on the control panel. This pauses the device. Then touch Cancel Current Job .

NOTE:

If you cancel a copy job, clear the document from the flatbed scanner or from the automatic document feeder.

132 Chapter 8 Copy ENWW

Job storage features for copy

You can create a stored copy job at the device control panel that can be printed at a later time.

Create a stored copy job

1.

Place the original document face-down on the glass or face-down in the ADF.

2.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

3.

Touch the Create tab.

4.

Specify the name for the stored job in one of these ways:

Select an existing folder from the list. Touch New Job and type a job name.

Touch the box below the existing Folder Name: or Job Name: on the right-hand side of the screen, and then edit the text.

5.

A private stored job has a lock icon next to the name, and it requires that you specify a PIN to retrieve it. To make the job private, select PIN to Print and then type the PIN for the job. Touch OK .

6.

Touch More Options to view and change other job storage options.

7.

After all the options are set, touch Create Stored Job ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen to scan the document and store the job. The job is saved on the device until you delete it, so you can print it as often as necessary.

Print a stored copy job

At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the device hard disk.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.

4.

Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to print.

5.

Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.

6.

Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.

7.

Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.

If the file has (lock symbol) next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN.

Delete a stored copy job

Jobs stored on the device hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Job Storage .

2.

Touch the Retrieve tab.

3.

Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.

ENWW Job storage features for copy 133

4.

Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to delete.

5.

Touch Delete .

6.

Touch Yes .

If the file has (lock symbol) next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete it.

134 Chapter 8 Copy ENWW

9 Scan and send to e-mail

The MFP offers color-scanning and digital-sending capabilities. By using the control panel, you can scan black-and-white or color documents and send them to an e-mail address as an e-mail attachment. To use digital sending, the device must be connected to a local area network (LAN).

NOTE:

The e-mail icon is not shown on the control panel if e-mail is not configured.

Configure the device to send e-mail

Use the Send E-mail screen

Perform basic e-mail functions

Use the address book

Change e-mail settings for the current job

Scan to a folder

Scan to a workflow destination

ENWW 135

Configure the device to send e-mail

Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the device.

NOTE:

The instructions that follow are for configuring the device at the control panel. You can also perform these procedures by using the embedded Web server. For more information, see

Embedded Web server on page 154 .

Supported protocols

The HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP models support Simple Mail Transfer

Protocol (SMTP) and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).

SMTP (e-mail gateway)

SMTP is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that send and receive email. In order for the device to send documents to e-mail, it must be connected to a LAN that has access to an e-mail server that supports SMTP. The SMTP server must also have Internet access.

If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address or host name for your SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL or cable connection, contact the internet service provider to obtain the SMTP server IP address.

LDAP

LDAP is used to gain access to a database of information. When the device uses LDAP, it searches a global list of e-mail addresses. As you begin to type the e-mail address, LDAP uses an auto-complete feature that supplies a list of e-mail addresses that match the characters you type. As you type additional characters, the list of matching e-mail addresses becomes smaller.

The device supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the device to be able to send to e-mail.

NOTE:

If you need to change the LDAP settings, you must change them by using the

embedded Web server. For more information, see Embedded Web server on page 154

, or see the Embedded Web Server User Guide on the device CD.

Configure e-mail server settings

Find the IP address for the SMTP server by touching the Network Address button on the controlpanel home screen or by consulting your system administrator. Then use the following procedures to manually configure and test the IP address.

Configure the SMTP gateway address

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch E-mail Setup , and then touch SMTP Gateway .

4.

Type the SMTP gateway address, either as an IP address or as a fully qualified domain name. If you do not know the IP address or domain name, contact the network administrator.

5.

Touch OK .

136 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail ENWW

Test the SMTP settings

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Initial Setup .

3.

Touch E-mail Setup , and then touch Test Send Gateway .

If the configuration is correct, Gateways OK appears on the control-panel display.

If the first test was successful, send an e-mail to yourself by using the digital-send feature. If you receive the e-mail, you have successfully configured the digital-sending feature.

If you do not receive the e-mail, use these actions to resolve issues with the digital-sending software:

Check the SMTP and address to make sure that you typed them correctly.

Print a configuration page. Verify that the SMTP gateway address is correct.

Make sure that the network is operating correctly. Send an e-mail to yourself from a computer. If you receive the e-mail, the network is operating correctly. If you do not receive the e-mail, contact your network administrator or Internet service provider (ISP).

Run the DISCOVER.EXE file. This program attempts to find the gateway. You can download the file from the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ ljm9050mfp .

ENWW Configure the device to send e-mail 137

Use the Send E-mail screen

Use the touchscreen to navigate through the options on the Send E-mail screen.

1

2

3

4

Send E-mail

Home button

From:

To:

field

field

button Touching this button scans the document and sends an e-mail file to the provided e-mail addresses.

Touching this button opens the Home screen.

Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type your e-mail address. If the system administrator has configured the device to do so, this field might automatically insert a default address.

Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type the e-mail addresses of those whom you want to receive the scanned document.

5 Subject: field Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type a subject title.

6 More Options button Touch this button to change certain e-mail settings for the current scan job.

7 Scroll bar Use the scroll bar to view and set up the CC: , BCC: , Message , and File Name fields. Touch any of those fields to open the keyboard and add the necessary information.

8 Address book buttons Touch these buttons to use the address book to populate the To: , CC: , or BCC: fields. For more information, see

Use the address book on page 141

.

9 Help button Touch this button for control-panel help. For more information, see

on page 12

.

Use the control panel

10 Error/warning button This button appears only when there is an error or warning in the status line area. Touch it to open a pop-up screen that will help you resolve the error or warning.

138 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail ENWW

Perform basic e-mail functions

The device e-mail feature offers the following benefits:

Sends documents to multiple e-mail addresses, saving time and delivery costs.

Delivers files in black-and-white or in color. Files can be sent in different file formats that the recipient can manipulate.

With e-mail, documents are scanned into the device memory and sent to an e-mail address or multiple addresses as an e-mail attachment. Digital documents can be sent in several graphics formats, such as .TFF and .JPG, which allows recipients to manipulate the document file in various programs to meet their specific needs. Documents arrive in near-original quality, and then can be printed, stored, or forwarded.

In order to use the e-mail feature, the device needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network that includes Internet access.

Load documents

You can scan a document by using either the glass or the ADF. The glass and ADF can accommodate Executive / A5 to Ledger (LDR, 11x17) / A3. Smaller originals, receipts, irregular and worn documents, stapled documents, previously folded documents, and photographs should be scanned by using the glass. Multiple-page documents can be scanned easily by using the ADF.

Send documents

The device scans both black-and-white and color originals. You can use default settings or change the scanning preferences and file formats. The following are the default settings:

Color

PDF (requires the recipient to have an Adobe Acrobat viewer to view the e-mail attachment)

For information about changing the settings for the current job, see Change e-mail settings for the current job on page 143 .

Send a document

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-down in the ADF.

2.

From the Home screen, touch E-mail .

3.

If prompted, type your user name and password.

4.

Complete the From: , To: , and Subject: fields. Scroll down and complete the CC: , BCC: , and

Message fields if appropriate. Your user name or other default information might appear in the

From: field. If so, you might not be able to change it.

5.

(Optional) Touch More Options to change the settings for the document that you are sending

(for example, the document’s original size). If you are sending a two-sided document, you should select Sides and an option with a two-sided original.

6.

Press Start to begin sending.

7.

When you are finished, remove the original document from the scanner glass, ADF, or output bin.

ENWW Perform basic e-mail functions 139

Use the auto-complete function

When you type characters into the To: , CC: , or From: fields on the Send E-mail screen, the autocomplete function is activated. As you type the required address or name by using the keyboard screen, the device automatically searches the address book list and completes the address or name by using the first match. You can then select that name by touching Enter , or continue typing the name until auto-complete finds the correct entry. If you type a character that does not match any entry in the list, the auto-complete text is removed from the display to indicate that you are typing an address that is not in the address book.

140 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail ENWW

Use the address book

You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the device. See your system administrator for information about configuring address lists.

NOTE:

You can also use the embedded Web server (EWS) to create and manage the e-mail address book. The EWS e-mail address book can be used to add, edit, or delete single e-mail addresses or e-mail distribution lists. For more information, see

Embedded Web server on page 154

.

Create a recipient list

1.

From the Home screen, touch E-mail .

2.

Complete one of the following steps:

Touch To: to open the keyboard screen, and then type the recipients' e-mail addresses.

Separate multiple e-mail addresses with a semicolon or by touching Enter on the touchscreen.

Use the address book.

a.

On the Send E-mail screen, touch the address book button ( ) to open the address book.

b.

Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar. Hold down the arrow to scroll quickly through the list.

c.

Highlight the name to select a recipient, and then touch the add button ( ).

You can also select a distribution list by touching the drop-down list at the top of the screen and then touching All , or add a recipient from a local list by touching Local in the drop-down list. Highlight the appropriate names, and then touch to add the name to your list of recipients.

You can remove a recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient, and then touching the remove button ( ).

3.

The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen. If you want, you can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e-mail address on the keyboard. After you are satisfied with your recipient list, touch OK .

4.

Touch OK .

5.

Finish typing information in the CC: and Subject: fields on the Send E-mail screen, if necessary.

You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To: text line.

6.

Press Start .

Use the local address book

Use the local address book to store frequently-used e-mail addresses. The local address book can be shared between devices that use the same server to gain access to the HP Digital Sending software.

You can use the address book when you type e-mail addresses in the From: , To: , CC: , or BCC: fields. You can also add or delete addresses in the address book.

ENWW Use the address book 141

To open the address book, touch the address book button ( ).

Add e-mail addresses to the local address book

1.

Touch Local .

2.

Touch .

3.

(Optional) Touch the Name field, and in the keyboard that appears type a name for the new entry. Touch OK .

The name is the alias for the e-mail address. If you do not type an alias name, the alias will be the e-mail address itself.

4.

Touch the Address field, and in the keyboard that appears type the e-mail address for the new entry. Touch OK .

Delete e-mail addresses from the local address book

You can delete e-mail addresses that you no longer use.

NOTE:

To change an e-mail address, you must first delete the address and then add the corrected address as a new address in the local address book.

1.

Touch Local .

2.

Touch the e-mail address that you want to delete.

3.

Touch .

The following confirmation message appears: Do you want to delete the selected address(es)?

4.

Touch Yes to delete the e-mail address(es) or touch No to return to the Address Book screen.

142 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail ENWW

Change e-mail settings for the current job

Use the More Options button to change the following e-mail settings for the current print job:

Button Description

Document File Type Touch this button to change the type of file the device creates after scanning the document.

Output Quality Touch this button to increase or decrease the print quality of the file being scanned. A higher quality setting produces a larger file size.

Resolution

Color/Black

Touch this button to change the scan resolution. A higher resolution setting produces a larger file size.

Touch this button to determine whether you will scan the document in color or in black-and-white.

Original Sides

Optimize Text/

Picture

Job Build

Touch this button to indicate if the original document is one-sided or two-sided.

Content Orientation Touch this button to select either the portrait or landscape orientation for the original.

Original Size Touch this button to select the size of the document: letter, A4, legal, or mixed letter/legal.

Touch this button to change the scanning procedure based on the type of document that you are scanning.

Image Adjustment

Touch this button to activate or deactivate the Job Build mode, which enables you to scan several small scan jobs and send them as one file.

Touch this button to change the darkness and sharpness settings, or to clean up background clutter on the original.

ENWW Change e-mail settings for the current job 143

Scan to a folder

If the system administrator has made the feature available, the device can scan a file and send it to a folder on the network. Supported operating systems for folder destinations include Windows 2000,

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista.

NOTE:

You might be required to supply a user name and password in order to use this option, or to send to certain folders. See your system administrator for more information.

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-down in the ADF.

2.

From the Home screen, touch Network Folder.

3.

In the Quick Access Folders list, select the folder in which you want to save the document.

4.

Touch the File Name field to open the keyboard pop-up screen, and then type the file name.

5.

Touch Send to Network Folder.

144 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail ENWW

Scan to a workflow destination

NOTE:

This device feature is provided by the optional Digital Sending Software.

If the system administrator has enabled the workflow functionality, you can scan a document and send it to a custom workflow destination. A workflow destination gives you the ability to send additional information, along with the scanned document, to a specified network or file transfer protocol (FTP) location. Prompts for specific information appear on the control-panel display. The system administrator can also designate a printer as a workflow destination, which allows you to scan a document and then send it directly to a network printer for printing.

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-down in the ADF.

2.

From the Home screen, touch Workflow.

3.

Select the destination to which you want to scan.

4.

In the Text Field field, type the data that you want to accompany the file, and then touch Send

Workflow.

ENWW Scan to a workflow destination 145

146 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail ENWW

10 Fax

Analog fax

Digital fax

ENWW 147

Analog fax

Add analog fax capabilities to the MFP by purchasing and installing the Analog Fax Accessory 300.

When the analog fax accessory is installed, the MFP can function as a standalone fax machine. See

Order parts, accessories, and supplies on page 244

for information about ordering the analog fax accessory. The Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax

Driver Guide are available at www.hp.com/go/mfpfaxaccessory300 .

Connect the fax accessory to a phone line

When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line being used for the fax accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. Also, this line should be an analog line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems.

If you are not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line, contact your telecom provider.

NOTE:

HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that the accessory functions correctly.

Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack.

1.

Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of the phone cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter. Push the connector until it clicks.

Figure 10-1

Connect the fax accessory to a phone line

CAUTION:

Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port, which is located at the bottom of the formatter.

2.

Connect the other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall. Push the connector until it clicks or until it is securely seated. Because different types of connectors are used in different countries/regions, the connector might not make an audible click.

Configure and use the fax features

Before you can use the fax features, you must configure them in the control-panel menus. For complete information about configuring and using the fax accessory, and for information about troubleshooting problems with the fax accessory, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300

User Guide. This guide is provided with the fax accessory.

148 Chapter 10 Fax ENWW

Use the Send Fax driver to send a fax from a computer without going to the MFP control panel. See the HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide for more information.

ENWW Analog fax 149

Digital fax

Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For information about ordering this software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/digitalsending .

With digital faxing, the MFP does not need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead, the MFP can send a fax in one of three ways:

LAN fax sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.

Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer that allows the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.

Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes, and the fax is delivered on a traditional fax machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.

For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided with the

HP Digital Sending Software.

150 Chapter 10 Fax ENWW

11 Manage and maintain

Information pages

Embedded Web server

HP Easy Printer Care

Use HP Web Jetadmin software

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

Security features

Set the real-time clock

Clean the MFP

Calibrate the scanner

Configure alerts

Manage supplies

Printer maintenance kit

Manage memory

Economy settings

ENWW 151

Information pages

Information pages provide details about the device and its current configuration. The following table provides the instructions for printing the information pages.

Page description How to print the page from the MFP control panel

Menu map

Shows the control-panel menus and available settings.

Configuration page

Shows device settings and installed accessories.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

3.

Touch Configuration/Status Pages .

4.

Touch Administration Menu Map .

5.

Touch Print .

The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the device.

For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see

Use the control panel on page 12 .

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

3.

Touch Configuration/Status Pages .

4.

Touch Configuration Page .

5.

Touch Print .

NOTE:

If the device contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk drive, additional configuration pages print that provide information about those devices.

Supplies status page

Shows status of print-cartridge life and status of maintenance kit.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

3.

Touch Configuration/Status Pages .

4.

Touch Supplies Status Page .

Usage page

Shows a page count for each size of paper printed, the number of onesided (simplexed) or two-sided

(duplexed) pages, and the average percentage of coverage.

File directory

Contains information for any mass storage devices, such as flash drives,

5.

Touch Print .

NOTE:

If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show the remaining life for those supplies.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

3.

Touch Configuration/Status Pages .

4.

Touch Usage Page .

5.

Touch Print .

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

152 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

ENWW

Page description

memory cards, or hard disks, that are installed in the device.

Fax reports

Five reports show fax activity, fax calls, billing codes, blocked fax numbers, and speed-dial numbers.

NOTE:

Fax reports are available only on models that have the fax accessory installed.

Font lists

Shows which fonts are currently installed in the device.

How to print the page from the MFP control panel

3.

Touch Configuration/Status Pages .

4.

Touch File Directory .

5.

Touch Print .

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

3.

Touch Fax Reports .

4.

Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:

Fax Activity Log

Fax Call Report

Billing Codes Report

Blocked Fax List

Speed Dial List

5.

Touch Print .

For more information, see the fax guide that came with the device.

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

3.

Touch Sample Pages/Fonts .

4.

Touch either PCL Font List or PS Font List .

5.

Touch Print .

NOTE:

The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or

DIMM.

Information pages 153

Embedded Web server

Use the embedded Web server to view MFP and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the MFP control panel. The following are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server:

NOTE:

When the printer is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care to view the printer status.

View MFP status information.

Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray.

Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.

View and change tray configurations.

View and change the MFP control-panel menu configuration.

View and print internal pages.

Receive notification of MFP and supplies events.

View and change network configuration.

To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or

Netscape 6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the MFP is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based MFP connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.

When the MFP is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.

NOTE:

For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web

Server User Guide, which is on the HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP software

CD.

Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection

1.

In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the device IP address or host name in the address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See

Information pages on page 152

.

NOTE:

After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.

2.

The embedded Web server has four tabs that contain settings and information about the device: the Information tab, the Settings tab, the Networking tab, and the Digital Sending tab. Click the tab that you want to view.

See

Embedded Web server sections on page 155 for more information about each tab.

154 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Embedded Web server sections

Tab or section

Information tab

Provides device, status, and configuration information

Settings tab

Provides the ability to configure the device from your computer

Options

Device Status: Shows the device status and shows the life remaining of

HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click

Change Settings.

Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page.

Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers.

To order new supplies, click Shop for Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window.

Event log: Shows a list of all device events and errors.

Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the device has printed, grouped by size and type.

Device Information: Shows the device network name, address, and model information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.

Control Panel: Shows messages from the device control panel, such as Ready or Sleep mode on.

Print: Allows you to send print jobs to the device.

Configure Device: Allows you to configure device settings. This page contains the traditional menus found on devices using a control-panel display.

Tray Sizes/Types: Allows you to assign paper sizes and paper types for each tray on the product.

E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.

Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various device and supplies events.

AutoSend: Allows you to configure the device to send automated e-mails regarding device configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.

Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the

Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server.

Authentication Manager: Allows you to determine which device functions will require a user to provide log-in information in order to use those functions.

LDAP Authentication: Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access

Protocol (LDAP) server to limit device access to certain users. The LDAP server will require a user to provide log-in information in order to gain access to the device.

Kerberos Authentication: Use the Kerberos Authentication page to configure the device to authenticate users to a Kerberos Realm. When Kerberos authentication is selected as the Log In Method for one or more Device Functions, the user at the device must enter valid credentials (username, password, and realm) to gain access to those functions.

ENWW Embedded Web server 155

Tab or section

Digital Sending tab

Provides the ability to change digital sending settings from your computer

Options

Device PIN: Allows you to limit access to one or more device functions using a

Personal Identification Number (PIN).

User PIN: Allows you to add user PIN records into the device, and to edit or delete user PIN records that have already been saved in the device. You can set up the device to require each user to provide their PIN when they access the device.

Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages.

Device Information: Allows you to name the device and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the device.

Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information.

Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server.

Wake Time: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the device.

NOTE:

The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this device is on a network, always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab.

General Settings: Allows you to set digital-sending administrator information.

Send to Folder: Allows you to send scanned documents to shared folders or FTP sites.

E-mail Settings: Allows you to configure SMTP settings, set the maximum e-mail attachment size, and set the default e-mail address for the product. You can also set a default subject for all e-mail messages that the product sends.

E-mail Address Book: Allows you to add e-mail addresses into the device, and to edit e-mail addresses that have already been saved in the device.

Fax Address Book: Allows you to add fax numbers into the device, and to edit fax numbers that have already been saved in the device.

Import/Export: Allows you to import and export address book and user information to and from the device.

LDAP Settings: Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

(LDAP) server to look up e-mail addresses.

Log: Allows you to view digital sending job information, including any errors that occur.

Preferences: Allows you to configure general settings for the digital-sending features.

156 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Tab or section

Networking tab

Provides the ability to change network settings from your computer

Other links

Contains links that connect you to the Internet

Options

Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the device when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the device is directly connected to a computer, or if the device is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server.

NOTE:

The Networking tab can be password-protected.

HP Instant Support™: Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service analyzes your device error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your device.

Shop for Supplies: Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.

Product Support: Connects to the support site for the device, from which you can search for help regarding general topics.

NOTE:

You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.

ENWW Embedded Web server 157

HP Easy Printer Care

HP Easy Printer Care is a software program that you can use for the following tasks:

Checking the device status

Checking the supplies status

Setting up alerts

Viewing device documentation

Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools

Printing usage reports

Fixing problems with HP drivers, software, and device firmware

You can use the HP Easy Printer Care when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. You must perform a complete software installation to use the HP

Easy Printer Care.

NOTE:

You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Easy Printer Care.

However, if you click a Web-based link, you must have Internet access to go to the site associated with the link.

For more information on HP Easy Printer Care, visit http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare .

Supported operating systems

HP Easy Printer Care is supported for Windows 2000, Windows XP Service Pack 2 (Professional or

Home), and Windows Vista.

Open the HP Easy Printer Care software

Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software:

On the Start menu, select Programs, select Hewlett-Packard, select HP Easy Printer Care, and then click Start HP Easy Printer Care.

In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy

Printer Care icon.

Double-click the desktop icon.

HP Easy Printer Care software sections

HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer. Some of the items that are in the following table might not be available for every product.

The Help button (?) in the upper-right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the options on that page.

158 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

ENWW

Section

Device List tab

When you open the software, this is the first page that appears.

NOTE:

To return to this page from any tab, click My HP Printers in the left side of the window.

Compatible Printers

Find Other Printers window

Add more products to the

My HP Printers list

Overview tab

Contains basic status information for the device

Support tab

Provides links to support information

Settings tab

Configure product settings, adjust printquality settings, and find information about specific product features

NOTE:

This tab is not available for some products.

Options

Devices list: Shows the products that you can select.

NOTE:

The product information appears either in list form or as icons, depending on the setting for the View as option.

The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product.

If you click a product in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care opens the

Overview tab for that product.

Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software.

Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other

Printers window. The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then monitor those products from your computer.

Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh button in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.

Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper that is loaded in each tray.

Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about product supplies, ordering information, and recycling information.

Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh button in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.

Device Management section: Provides links to information about HP Easy

Printer Care, to advanced product settings, and to product usage reports.

Troubleshooting and Help: Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve problems, to online product support information, and to online

HP experts.

About: Provides general information about this tab.

General: Provides information about the product, such as the model number, serial number, and the settings for date and time, if they are available.

Information Pages: Provides links to print the information pages that are available for the product.

Capabilities: Provides information about product features, such as duplexing, the available memory, and the available printing personalities.

Click Change to adjust the settings.

Print Quality: Provides information about print-quality settings. Click

Change to adjust the settings.

Trays / Paper: Provides information about the trays and how they are configured. Click Change to adjust the settings.

Restore Defaults: Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory defaults. Click Restore to restore the settings to the defaults.

HP Easy Printer Care 159

Section

HP Proactive Support

NOTE:

This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

Supplies Ordering button

Click the Supplies Ordering button on any tab to open the Supplies

Ordering window, which provides access to online supplies ordering.

NOTE:

This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

Alert Settings link

NOTE:

This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

Options

When enabled, HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify potential problems. Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans occur. This page also provides information about available updates for product software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can accept or decline each recommended update.

Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each product. To order a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list. You can sort the list by product, or by the supplies that need to be ordered the soonest. The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the My HP Printers list.

Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a new browser window. If you have checked the Order check box for any items, the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies.

Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check box selected.

Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window, in which you can configure alerts for each product.

Alerting is on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature.

Printer Alerts: Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only, or for any error.

Job Alerts: For products that support it, you can receive alerts for specific print jobs.

Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing.

Color Access Control

NOTE:

This item is available only for

HP color products that support Color

Access Control.

NOTE:

This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

160 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Use HP Web Jetadmin software

HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies crossplatform management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive, allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected.

Download this free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software .

To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically connect to the HP Web site.

If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.

Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.

NOTE:

Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.

ENWW Use HP Web Jetadmin software 161

HP Printer Utility for Macintosh

Use the optional HP Printer Utility to configure and maintain a printer from a Mac OS X V10.2, V10.3, or V10.4 computer. This section describes several functions that you can perform through the HP

Printer Utility.

Open the HP Printer Utility

The process that you use to start the HP Printer Utility depends on the Macintosh operating system that you are using.

Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2

1.

Open the Finder, and then click Applications.

2.

Click Library, and then click Printers.

3.

Click hp, and then click Utilities.

4.

Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.

5.

Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utilities.

Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 or Mac OS X V10.4

1.

In the Dock, click the Printer Setup Utility icon.

NOTE:

If the Printer Setup Utility icon does not appear in the Dock, open the Finder, click

Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.

2.

Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utilities.

Print a cleaning page

Print a cleaning page if the printer is not printing jobs at the expected quality level.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Cleaning.

3.

Click Print Cleaning Page to print the cleaning page.

Print a configuration page

Print a configuration page to view the printer settings.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Configuration Page.

3.

Click Print Configuration Page to print the configuration page.

162 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

View supplies status

View the status of the printer supplies (such as print cartridges, imaging drum, or print media) from a computer.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Supplies Status.

3.

Click the Supplies tab to view the status of various replaceable supplies, and click the Media tab to view the status of print media.

To view a more detailed status list, click Detailed Supplies Information. The Supplies

Information dialog box appears.

To order supplies online, click Order HP Supplies. You must have Internet access in order to use the online ordering Web page. For more information about online ordering, see

Order supplies online and use other support features on page 163 .

Order supplies online and use other support features

Use the HP Web site to order printer supplies, register the printer, get customer support, or learn about recycling printer supplies. You must have Internet access in order to use the supplies and support Web pages.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select HP Support.

3.

Click one of the following buttons:

Instant Support: Opens a Web page that you can use to seek technical assistance.

Order Supplies Online: Opens a Web page that you can use to order printer supplies.

Online Registration: Opens a Web page that you can use to register the printer.

Return & Recycle: Opens a Web page that you can use to find information about recycling used supplies.

Upload a file to the printer

Send a file from the computer to the printer. The action that the printer takes depends on the type of file that is being sent to it. For example, when a print-ready file (such as a .PS or .PCL file) is sent, the printer prints the file.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select File Upload.

3.

Click Choose, navigate to the file that you want to upload, and then click OK.

4.

Click Upload to load the file.

ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 163

Update the firmware

Update the printer firmware by loading the new firmware file from the computer. You can find new firmware files for your printer at www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp_firmware or www.hp.com/go/ ljm9050mfp_firmware .

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Firmware Update.

3.

Click Choose, navigate to the firmware file that you want to upload, and then click OK.

4.

Click Upload to load the firmware file.

Activate the two-sided printing (duplexing) mode

Turn on the two-sided printing feature on printers equipped with automatic duplexers.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Duplex mode.

3.

Select Enable Duplex Mode to activate the two-sided printing mode, and then click Apply Now.

Lock or unlock printer storage devices

Manage access to printer storage devices from the computer.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Lock Resources.

3.

On the Control Panel Access Level pop-up menu, select the access level that you want to set for the printer control panel.

4.

Select the devices that you want to lock, and clear any devices that you want to unlock.

5.

Click Apply Now.

Save or print stored jobs

Turn on the printer job-storing function, or print a stored job from the computer. You also can delete a stored print job.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Stored Jobs.

3.

Perform any of the following tasks:

To turn on the job-storing function, select Enable Job Storing, and then click Apply Now.

To print a stored job, select a stored job in the list, type the necessary personal identification number (PIN) in the Enter Secure Job PIN box, type the number of copies that you want in the Copies To Print box, and then click Print.

To delete a stored job, select a stored job in the list, and then click Delete.

164 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Configure trays

Change the default printer tray settings from the computer.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Tray Configuration.

3.

In the Trays list, select the tray to be configured.

NOTE:

To make the selected tray the default tray for printing, click Make Default.

4.

In the Default Media Size pop-up menu, select the default media size for the tray.

5.

In the Default Media Type pop-up menu, select the default media type for the tray.

6.

Click Apply Now.

Change network settings

Change the network internet protocol (IP) settings from the computer. You also can open the embedded Web server to change additional settings. For more information, see

Embedded Web server on page 154 .

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select IP Settings.

3.

Change any of the settings in the following pop-up menus or fields:

Configuration

Host Name

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

If you want to change more settings in the embedded Web server, click Additional Network

Settings. The embedded Web server opens with the Networking tab selected.

4.

Click Apply Now.

Open the embedded Web server

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select Additional Settings.

3.

Click Open Embedded Web Server.

ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 165

Set up e-mail alerts

Set up e-mail messages that alert you to certain events that occur with the printer, such as a low toner level in a print cartridge.

1.

Open the HP Printer Utility.

2.

In the Configuration Settings list, select E-mail Alerts.

3.

Click the Server tab, and, in the SMTP Server box, type the server name.

4.

Click the Destination tab, click the add (+) button, and then type the e-mail addresses, mobile device numbers, or Web site URLs to which you want the e-mail alerts sent.

NOTE:

If your printer supports e-mail lists, you can make alerts lists for specific events the same way that you added e-mail addresses.

5.

Click the Events tab, and, in the list, define the events for which an e-mail alert should be sent.

6.

To test the alerts setup, click the Server tab, and then click Test. A sample message is sent to the defined e-mail addresses if the configuration is correct.

7.

Click Apply Now.

166 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Security features

This section explains important security features that are available for the MFP:

Secure the embedded Web server

Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)

Secure Disk Erase

Security Lock

Authentication

Lock the control-panel menus

Secure the embedded Web server

Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change the MFP settings.

1.

Open the embedded Web server. See

Embedded Web server on page 154 .

2.

Click the Settings tab.

3.

On the left side of the window, click Security.

4.

Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.

5.

Click Apply. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.

Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)

The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the MFP. By using the FIH and third-party equipment, you can track information about copies that are made on the MFP.

Requirements

Windows 9X, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices

Use the FIH

To use the FIH, you must download and install the FIH software. The software is available from www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp_software or www.hp.com/go/ljm9050mfp_software . The software is used to enable or disable the FIH portal. Use the software to set and change the administrator personal identification number (PIN).

Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes.

Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication.

NOTE:

It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software. The

PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH.

ENWW Security features 167

Enable the FIH portal

1.

Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Click Enable.

4.

If you have not entered a PIN before, click No. If you have entered a PIN before, click Yes. If you click No, type and confirm the PIN, and then click OK. If you click Yes, type the PIN and click OK.

NOTE:

The PIN must be numeric.

5.

Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected, type the MFP port. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the MFP.

NOTE:

The IP address for the MFP can be found on the Configuration page.

If you typed an incorrect IP address, you will receive an error message. Otherwise, the portal is enabled.

Disable the FIH portal

1.

Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Click Disable.

4.

Type the PIN and click OK.

5.

Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected, type the MFP port and click OK. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the

MFP, and then click OK. The portal is disabled.

NOTE:

If you lose the PIN number and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default PIN that is listed to disable it. For assistance, use the HP Instant Support service, which is available through the embedded Web server or at http://instantsupport.hp.com

. See

Embedded Web server on page 154 .

Secure Disk Erase

To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the MFP hard drive, use the Secure Disk Erase feature. This feature can securely erase print and copy jobs from the hard drive.

Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:

Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed, but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent datastorage operations. This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.

Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk media.

Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This

168 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense

5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.

Data affected

Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created during the print and copying process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, disk-based macros (forms), stored fax files, address books, and HP and third-party applications.

NOTE:

Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the

Retrieve Job menu on the MFP after the appropriate erase mode has been set.

This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the flash-based system boot RAM.

Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the

MFP cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.

Gain access to Secure Disk Erase

Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.

Additional Information

For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin/ .

Security Lock

The security lock is a mechanical lock that is used to prevent the removal of internal computer components. Optional EIO accessories are not protected, however. Purchase the security lock assembly separately, and then install it on the MFP.

Figure 11-1

Security lock

Authentication

This MFP offers several embedded authentication methods. These methods include Kerberos,

LDAP, LDAP over SSL, and PIN.

Optional HP Digital Send Software supports Windows SPNEGO, LDAP, LDAP over SSL, and Novell authentication.

ENWW Security features 169

Lock the control-panel menus

To prevent someone from changing the MFP configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus.

This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server.

The following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control-panel menus by using the

HP Web Jetadmin software. (See

Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 161 .)

1.

Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.

2.

Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel.

Navigate to the DEVICE LISTS folder.

3.

Select the MFP.

4.

In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.

5.

Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.

6.

Type a Device Password.

7.

In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users from gaining access to configuration settings.

170 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Set the real-time clock

Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so you can identify the most recent versions of stored print jobs.

1.

On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Time/Scheduling .

3.

Touch Date/Time .

4.

Choose a date format.

5.

Choose a time format.

6.

Touch the Date fields to enter the date.

7.

Touch the Time fields to enter the time.

8.

Touch Save .

ENWW Set the real-time clock 171

Clean the MFP

Print a cleaning page

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Print Quality .

3.

Touch Calibration/Cleaning .

4.

Touch Create Cleaning Page .

The device prints a cleaning page.

5.

Follow the instructions printed on the cleaning page.

Clean the MFP hardware

To maintain print quality, clean the MFP thoroughly:

● every time you change the print cartridge

● whenever print-quality problems occur

Clean the outside of the MFP with a lightly water-dampened cloth. Clean the inside with only a dry, lint-free cloth. Observe all warnings and cautions regarding the cleaning tasks.

WARNING!

Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the MFP. It can be hot.

WARNING!

Do not touch the transfer roller when cleaning the MFP.

CAUTION:

To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the MFP.

Clean the paper path

1.

Before you begin these steps, turn the MFP off (button out) and disconnect all cables, including the power cord.

Figure 11-2

Clean the paper path (1 of 6)

172 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

ENWW

2.

Open the front cover of the MFP, rotate the green lever downward to the unlocked position, and remove the print cartridge.

Figure 11-3

Clean the paper path (2 of 6)

CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the print cartridge, use two hands when removing it from the

MFP. Do not expose the print cartridge to light for more than a few minutes. Cover the print cartridge when it is outside of the MFP.

NOTE:

If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth, and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

3.

With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe any residue from the paper path area, the registration roller, and the print cartridge cavity.

Figure 11-4

Clean the paper path (3 of 6)

4.

Replace the print cartridge.

Figure 11-5

Clean the paper path (4 of 6)

Clean the MFP 173

5.

Rotate the green handle into the locked position.

Figure 11-6

Clean the paper path (5 of 6)

6.

Close the front cover, reconnect all cables, and turn the MFP on (button in).

Figure 11-7

Clean the paper path (6 of 6)

Clean the outside of the MFP

Clean the outside of the MFP if it is visibly marked.

Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water.

Clean the touchscreen

Clean the touch screen when needed (fingerprints, dust build-up).

Wipe the touch screen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.

CAUTION:

Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touch screen. Do not pour or spray water directly onto the touch screen.

Clean the glass

Clean the glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality, such as streaking.

Clean the glass surface by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth.

CAUTION:

Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the glass.Do not press hard on the glass surface. (You could break the glass).

174 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Clean the ADF delivery system

Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality (such as streaking).

1.

Lift the top cover.

Figure 11-8

Clean the ADF delivery system (1 of 5)

2.

Locate the top and bottom ADF glass strips.

Figure 11-9

Clean the ADF delivery system (2 of 5)

3.

Clean the glass strips by wiping them gently with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth.

4.

Locate the white, vinyl backing.

Figure 11-10

Clean the ADF delivery system (3 of 5)

5.

Locate the white, vinyl calibration strips.

Figure 11-11

Clean the ADF delivery system (4 of 5)

ENWW Clean the MFP 175

6.

Clean the ADF backing and the calibration strips by wiping them with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth.

7.

Close the top cover.

Figure 11-12

Clean the ADF delivery system (5 of 5)

Clean the top ADF glass strip

If you are still experiencing poor copy quality, you might need to clean the top ADF glass strip.

CAUTION:

Clean this area only if you see copy defects such as streaks, and you notice dust inside the glass strip. Cleaning this area frequently could introduce dust into the MFP.

1.

Open the ADF cover.

Figure 11-13

Clean the top ADF glass strip (1 of 4)

2.

Locate the latch that releases the top ADF glass strip. Push the latch to the left, and pull down to expose the inside of the glass strip.

Figure 11-14

Clean the top ADF glass strip (2 of 4)

3.

Gently wipe the glass with a dry, lint-free cloth.

CAUTION:

Use dry cloth only in this area. Do not use solvents, cleaners, water, or compressed air. Doing so could severely damage the MFP.

176 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

4.

Pull the latch to the left and return the glass strip to its normal position.

Figure 11-15

Clean the top ADF glass strip (3 of 4)

5.

Close the ADF cover.

Figure 11-16

Clean the top ADF glass strip (4 of 4)

Clean the ADF rollers

You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks as they exit the ADF.

1.

Open the top cover.

CAUTION:

Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you notice dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the MFP.

Figure 11-17

Clean the ADF rollers (1 of 6)

2.

Locate the rollers near the glass strips.

Figure 11-18

Clean the ADF rollers (2 of 6)

ENWW Clean the MFP 177

3.

Wipe the rollers gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.

CAUTION:

Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the MFP.

4.

Close the top cover.

Figure 11-19

Clean the ADF rollers (3 of 6)

5.

Open the ADF cover.

Figure 11-20

Clean the ADF rollers (4 of 6)

6.

Locate the rollers.

Figure 11-21

Clean the ADF rollers (5 of 6)

7.

Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.

CAUTION:

Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the MFP.

178 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

8.

Close the ADF cover.

Figure 11-22

Clean the ADF rollers (6 of 6)

9.

Close the delivery guide and wipe its outside surface with the cloth.

ENWW Clean the MFP 179

Calibrate the scanner

Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for

ADF and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the document is captured.

Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images.

The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Troubleshooting .

3.

Touch Calibrate Scanner .

4.

Touch Calibrate and then follow the on-screen instructions.

180 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Configure alerts

You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the MFP’s embedded Web server to configure the system to alert you of problems with the MFP. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account or accounts that you specify.

You can configure the following:

The printer(s) you want to monitor

What alerts are to be received (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, supplies status, and cover open)

The e-mail account to which the alerts should be forwarded

Software

HP Web Jetadmin

Embedded Web server

Information location

See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details on alerts and how to set them up.

See Embedded Web server on page 58

for general information about the embedded Web server.

See the embedded Web server Help system for details on alerts and how to set them up.

ENWW Configure alerts 181

Manage supplies

Use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results.

HP print cartridges

When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following supplies information:

Percentage of supplies remaining

Estimated number of pages remaining

Number of pages printed

NOTE:

See

Supplies and accessories on page 243

for cartridge ordering information.

Non-HP print cartridges

Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will not be covered under the MFP warranty.

If the non-HP print cartridge was sold to you as a genuine HP product, see

HP fraud hotline on page 182 .

Print cartridge authentication

The HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP automatically authenticate the print cartridges when the cartridges are inserted into the MFP. During authentication, the MFP will let you know if a cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge.

If the MFP control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe you purchased an HP print cartridge, call the HP fraud hotline.

To override a non-HP print cartridge error message, touch OK .

HP fraud hotline

Contact the HP fraud hotline if you install an HP print cartridge and a message on the control panel states that the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the product is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.

The following issues are signs that your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge:

A high number of problems occur with the print cartridge.

The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from HP packaging).

Go to www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies/whybuy_fraud.html

for more information.

Print cartridge storage

Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.

182 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.

Table 11-1 Print cartridge temperature specifications

Environmental condition Recommended Allowed Storage/standby

Temperature (print cartridge) 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F) 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F) -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)

Print cartridge life expectancy

Average cartridge yield is 30,000 pages in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. Actual yield depends on specific use.

Check the print cartridge life

You can check the print cartridge life on the MFP control panel, in the embedded Web server, MFP software, HP Easy Printer Care, or through the HP Web Jetadmin software.

On the MFP control panel

1.

From the Home screen, touch Administration .

2.

Touch Information .

3.

Touch Configuration Page .

4.

Touch Supplies Status Page .

5.

Touch Print .

NOTE:

If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show the remaining life for those supplies.

In the embedded Web server

1.

In your browser, type the IP address or host name for the printer home page. This takes you to the printer status page.

2.

On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status page, which provides print cartridge information.

Through HP Easy Printer Care

In the Overview tab in the Supplies Status section, click Supplies Details to open the supplies status page.

Through HP Web Jetadmin

In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer device. The device status page shows print cartridge information.

ENWW Manage supplies 183

Printer maintenance kit

NOTE:

The printer maintenance kit is a consumable and is not covered under warranty.

To ensure optimum print quality, HP recommends that a new printer maintenance kit be installed approximately every 350,000 pages. Depending on how you use the MFP, you might need to replace the kit more often. If you have questions about how frequently you should replace the printer maintenance kit, contact the support center at www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/ support/ljm9050mfp .

When the Replace maintenance kit message appears on the control panel, you need to purchase a printer maintenance kit and install the new parts. The part number for the 110V kit is C9152A. The part number for the 220V kit is C9153A. The printer maintenance kit contains two Type 1 rollers, seven Type 2 rollers, one transfer roller assembly, and one fuser assembly. Complete instructions for installing the kit components are included in the printer maintenance kit box.

184 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Manage memory

The MFP has two double data rate (DDR) DIMM slots to provide more MFP memory. DDR DIMMs are available in 64, 128, and 256 MB, for a maximum of 512 MB.

The MFP has two compact flash slots to provide the following features:

To add flash-based memory accessory fonts, macros, and patterns, use the appropriate DDR

DIMM.

To add other flash-based printer languages and MFP options, use the appropriate DDR DIMM.

NOTE:

Single in line memory modules (SIMMs) used on previous HP LaserJet products are not compatible with this MFP.

For ordering information, go to www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp .

Determine memory requirements

The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you print. Your MFP can print most text and graphics at 1200 dpi FastRes without additional memory.

You might want to add more memory to the MFP if you often print complex graphics or PS documents, print two-sided documents (duplex printing), use many downloaded fonts, or print large paper sizes (such as A3, B4, or 11 x 17).

Install memory

Use this procedure to install additional DDR memory DIMMs. Before you begin, print a configuration page to find out how much memory is installed in the MFP. The following table lists the maximum amount of memory allowed for each DIMM slot.

Slot label on the Configuration page Slot label on the Formatter board

Slot 1

Slot 2

Total

J1

J2

Description

256 MB

128 MB

CAUTION:

Static electricity can damage DDR DIMMs. When handling DDR DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package, and then touch bare metal on the MFP.

1.

If you have not already done so, print a configuration page to find out how much memory is installed in the MFP.

ENWW Manage memory 185

2.

Slide the optional output device away from the print engine.

Figure 11-23

Install DDR memory DIMMs (1 of 8)

3.

Turn the MFP off. Disconnect the power cord and any cables.

Figure 11-24

Install DDR memory DIMMs (2 of 8)

4.

Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the back of the MFP.

Figure 11-25

Install DDR memory DIMMs (3 of 8)

5.

Grasp the screws and pull the formatter board out of the MFP. Place it on a flat, non-conductive surface.

Figure 11-26

Install DDR memory DIMMs (4 of 8)

186 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

ENWW

6.

Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Hold the DIMM with fingers against the side edges and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot.

(Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.)

Figure 11-27

Install DDR memory DIMMs (5 of 8)

7.

Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure the locks on each side of the

DIMM snap inward into place. (To remove a DIMM, the locks must be released.)

Figure 11-28

Install DDR memory DIMMs (6 of 8)

8.

Slide the formatter board back into the MFP and tighten the two screws.

Figure 11-29

Install DDR memory DIMMs (7 of 8)

Manage memory 187

9.

Plug in the power cord and connect all cables. Turn the MFP on.

Figure 11-30

Install DDR memory DIMMs (8 of 8)

10.

Reconnect the optional output device to the MFP.

Verify memory installation

Follow this procedure to verify that DDR DIMMs are installed correctly:

1.

Check that the MFP control panel displays Ready when the MFP is turned on. If an error message appears, a DIMM might have been incorrectly installed.

2.

Print the configuration page.

3.

Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration before the DIMM installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, one of the following situations might have occurred:

The DIMM might not be installed correctly. Repeat the installation procedure.

The DIMM might be defective. Try a new DIMM, or try installing the DIMM in a different slot.

NOTE:

If you installed a printer language (personality), check the Installed Personalities and

Options section on the configuration page. This area should list the new printer language.

188 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

Economy settings

Sleep and wake

Set the sleep delay

Use the sleep-delay feature to set the period of time that the MFP must be idle before it enters the sleep mode. The default setting is 45 minutes.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Time/Scheduling .

3.

Touch Sleep Delay .

4.

Touch the sleep-delay setting that you want.

Set the sleep time

Use the sleep time feature to put the MFP in sleep mode at a set time each day.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Time/Scheduling .

3.

Touch Sleep Time .

4.

Touch the day of the week for the sleep time.

5.

Touch Custom .

6.

Touch Save .

7.

Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.

8.

If you want to put the MFP in sleep mode at the same time every day (including weekends), on the Apply to All Days screen, touch Yes . If you want to set the time for individual days, touch

No , and repeat the procedure for each day.

Set the wake time

Use the wake time feature to wake the MFP at a set time each day.

1.

Scroll to and touch Administration .

2.

Touch Time/Scheduling .

3.

Touch Wake Time .

4.

Touch the day of the week for the wake time.

5.

Touch Custom .

6.

Touch Save .

ENWW Economy settings 189

7.

Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.

8.

If you want to wake the MFP at the same time every day (including weekends), on the Apply to

All Days screen, touch Yes . If you want to set the time for individual days, touch No , and repeat the procedure for each day.

190 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain ENWW

12 Problem solve

Solve problems

Determining Solve MFP problems

Control-panel message types

Control-panel messages

Clear jams

Media-handling problems

Solve print-quality problems

Solve fax problems

Solve copy problems

Solve e-mail problems

Solve network connectivity problems

Solve common Macintosh problems

ENWW 191

Solve problems

If the MFP is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the

MFP does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.

Troubleshooting checklist

1.

Make sure that the MFP Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:

a.

Check the power-cable connections.

b.

Check that the power switch is on.

c.

Check the power source by plugging the MFP directly into the wall or into a different outlet.

d.

If none of these measures restores power, contact HP Customer Care.

2.

Check the cabling.

a.

Check the cable connection between the MFP and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure.

b.

Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.

c.

Check the network connection. See

Solve network connectivity problems on page 237 .

3.

Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications.

4.

Print a configuration page (see

Information pages on page 152

). If the MFP is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.

a.

If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media.

b.

If the page jams in the MFP, see

Clear jams on page 196 .

5.

If the configuration page prints, check the following items.

a.

If the page prints correctly, then the MFP hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.

b.

If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the MFP hardware. Contact

HP Customer Care.

6.

Verify that you have installed the HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP printer driver.

7.

Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work, try printing the job from another computer that has the MFP software installed.

8.

If the problem is still not resolved, see

Determining Solve MFP problems on page 193 .

192 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Determining Solve MFP problems

Situation/Message

The control-panel display is blank, and internal fans are not running.

The MFP is turned on, but the internal fans are not running.

The MFP voltage is not correct.

Messages appear on the control-panel display.

Print media is jammed in the MFP.

The control-panel display shows the wrong language or unfamiliar characters.

An error occurs during a Digital Send job. Job failed.

The e-mail gateway could not accept the job because the attachment is too large.

A network connection is required for digital sending

Solution

Make sure that the MFP power is on. Press all the keys to see if one is stuck. Contact your HP-authorized service representative if these steps do not work.

Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the MFP power configuration. (See the label on the back of the device for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and its voltage is not within specification, plug the MFP directly into the power receptacle.

Make sure that the line voltage is in the correct range. (See the label on the back of the device for voltage requirements.)

See Control-panel messages on page 195 .

Check for jams. For more information, see

Clear jams on page 196 .

Reconfigure the control-panel display language.

Turn the MFP off and then on.

Administration > Device Behavior > Language

The MFP experienced an error during the digital sending job. The administrator should check on the status of the

SMTP server. See Solve e-mail problems on page 236

.

Reduce the size of the e-mail attachment by setting the maximum attachment size. Set the maximum attachment size on the Digital Sending tab of the embedded Web

server. See Embedded Web server on page 154 .

Try using a different file format or sending the document a few pages at a time.

The MFP cannot find a network connection. The administrator should check to see if the MFP is connected to the network. See

Solve network connectivity problems on page 237

.

ENWW Determining Solve MFP problems 193

Control-panel message types

Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the device.

Message type

Status messages

Warning messages

Error messages

Description

Status messages reflect the current state of the device. They inform you of normal device operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the device changes. Whenever the device is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready appears if the device is online.

Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the Ready or status messages and remain until you touch OK . Some warning messages are clearable. If Clearable Warnings is set to Job on the device Device Behavior menu, the next print job clears these messages.

Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing a jam.

Some error messages are auto-continuable. If Auto Continue is set on the menus, the device will continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.

NOTE:

Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.

Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the device off and then on. These messages are not affected by the Auto Continue setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.

194 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Control-panel messages

The product provides robust control panel messaging. When a message appears on the control panel, follow the on-screen instructions to resolve the issue. If the product displays an “Error” or

“Attention” message, and no steps are shown to resolve the issue, turn the product off then on.

Contact HP support if you continue to experience issues with the product.

To get additional information for warnings that appear in the status line, touch the Warning button .

For additional information on a variety of topics, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the home screen.

ENWW Control-panel messages 195

Clear jams

If a jam message appears on the control panel, look for media in the locations indicated in the following illustration. You might need to look for jammed media in locations other than those that are indicated in the jam message. If the location of the jam is not obvious, look first in the front door area.

After looking at the illustration, you can go to the procedure for clearing the jam. When clearing jams, be very careful not to tear the media. If a small piece of media remains in the MFP, it could cause

additional jams. If jams are a recurring problem, see Solve repeated jams on page 215

.

NOTE:

Loose toner might remain in the MFP after a jam and cause output quality problems. These should clear up within a few pages.

WARNING!

Surfaces in and around the MFP can be hot to the touch. Turn off the MFP and allow it to cool before attempting to clear jams.

Jam locations

Figure 12-1

HP LaserJet M9040 MFP or HP LaserJet M9050 MFP with the 3000-sheet stapler/ stacker

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

9

10

196 Chapter 12 Problem solve

ADF

Tray 1

Right door

Vertical transfer door

Tray 4

Trays 2 and 3

Left door (behind the output device)

Duplexer (inside the MFP)

Output device

Lower bin

ENWW

11

12

Front door and print-cartridge area

Upper bin

Clear jams from the duplexer

1.

Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.

Figure 12-2

Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (1 of 6)

2.

Open the left door and carefully pull out any paper from area.

WARNING!

Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.

Figure 12-3

Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (2 of 6)

3.

Remove the duplex printing accessory by pressing the green lever and pulling the unit out until it stops.

Figure 12-4

Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (3 of 6)

4.

Remove any paper by lifting the two green levers in the duplex printing accessory.

ENWW Clear jams 197

5.

Open the front door.

Figure 12-5

Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (4 of 6)

6.

Check for paper in the duplex printing accessory area, and remove any paper by pulling it out of the MFP. Be careful not to tear the paper.

Figure 12-6

Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (5 of 6)

7.

Reinstall the duplex printing accessory by sliding it back into the slot until it locks into place.

Figure 12-7

Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (6 of 6)

8.

Close all open doors. Push the output device back into place.

198 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Clear jams from the input-tray areas

Clear jams in tray 1

1.

Check for media in the tray 1 area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to be sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.

Figure 12-8

Clear jams in tray 1 (1 of 2)

2.

Open and close the right door to reset the MFP.

Figure 12-9

Clear jams in tray 1 (2 of 2)

Clear jams inside the right door

1.

Open the right door.

Figure 12-10

Clear jams inside the right door (1 of 3)

2.

Check for media in the right door area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to be sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.

ENWW Clear jams 199

3.

Open the jam access cover. Pull out and lift the green tab.

Figure 12-11

Clear jams inside the right door (2 of 3)

4.

Remove any media from this area by pulling it out of the MFP.

5.

Push the green lever down to the original position.

Figure 12-12

Clear jams inside the right door (3 of 3)

6.

Close the right door.

Clear jams in trays 2 and 3

1.

Open the tray until it stops.

Figure 12-13

Clear jams in trays 2 and 3 (1 of 3)

2.

Check for media in the tray area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to be sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.

200 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

3.

Close the tray.

Figure 12-14

Clear jams in trays 2 and 3 (2 of 3)

4.

Open the right door, remove any visible media, and close the right door. This resets the MFP.

Figure 12-15

Clear jams in trays 2 and 3 (3 of 3)

Clear jams in tray 4

1.

Open the vertical transfer door on tray 4.

Figure 12-16

Clear jams in tray 4 (1 of 4)

2.

Check for paper in this area, and remove any paper from this area. Carefully check to be sure that you have removed all pieces of torn paper.

3.

If you did not see any paper in the vertical transfer door, open tray 4.

Figure 12-17

Clear jams in tray 4 (2 of 4)

ENWW

4.

Check for paper in the tray area, and remove any paper from this area. Carefully check to be sure you have removed all pieces of torn paper.

Clear jams 201

5.

Close tray 4.

Figure 12-18

Clear jams in tray 4 (3 of 4)

6.

Close the vertical transfer door.

Figure 12-19

Clear jams in tray 4 (4 of 4)

Clear jams from the output areas

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker

1.

If the jam extends into the output bins, slowly and carefully pull the media straight out of the

MFP so that it does not tear.

Figure 12-20

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (1 of 7)

2.

Move the output device away from the MFP.

Figure 12-21

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (2 of 7)

202 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

3.

On the stacker, lift the wire on the lower bin of the device, and carefully pull out any media from this area. On the stapler/stacker, carefully pull out any media that might be protruding from the accumulator area.

NOTE:

Only the stacker has the wire on the lower bin.

Figure 12-22

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (3 of 7)

4.

Locate the green handle in the flipper area and lift the handle.

Figure 12-23

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (4 of 7)

5.

Carefully pull out any media from the flipper area.

Figure 12-24

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (5 of 7)

WARNING!

Avoid touching the flipper area. It can be hot.

6.

Locate the green handle in the paper path module, and then pull down on the handle.

Figure 12-25

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (6 of 7)

ENWW

7.

Carefully pull out any media from the paper path module.

Clear jams 203

8.

Close all open doors. Push the output device back into place.

Figure 12-26

Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (7 of 7)

Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher

1.

Open the top cover.

Figure 12-27

Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher (1 of 3)

2.

Slowly and carefully pull the paper straight out of the finisher so that it does not tear.

Figure 12-28

Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher (2 of 3)

3.

Close the finisher cover.

Figure 12-29

Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher (3 of 3)

204 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP

1.

Move the finisher away from the MFP.

Figure 12-30

Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (1 of 4)

2.

Carefully remove any paper from the MFP output area.

Figure 12-31

Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (2 of 4)

3.

Carefully remove any paper from the finisher input area.

Figure 12-32

Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (3 of 4)

4.

Push the multifunction finisher back into place.

Figure 12-33

Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (4 of 4)

ENWW Clear jams 205

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher

1.

Move the finisher away from the MFP.

Figure 12-34

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (1 of 7)

2.

If paper is jammed in the finisher input area but has not entered the folding rollers, carefully remove the paper from the input area and then skip to step 7.

Figure 12-35

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (2 of 7)

3.

Open the back door on the finisher. If jammed paper inside the finisher has not entered the folding rollers, remove the paper and then skip to step 7. If the paper has entered the folding rollers, proceed to step 4.

Figure 12-36

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (3 of 7)

4.

Open the stapler-unit door.

Figure 12-37

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (4 of 7)

206 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

5.

Turn the bottom green knob clockwise to advance the jammed paper through the folding rollers and into the booklet bin.

Figure 12-38

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (5 of 7)

6.

Close the stapler-unit door.

Figure 12-39

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (6 of 7)

7.

Push the multifunction finisher back into place.

Figure 12-40

Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (7 of 7)

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher

1.

Open the stapler-unit door.

Figure 12-41

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (1 of 11)

ENWW Clear jams 207

2.

Slide the stapler unit toward you.

Figure 12-42

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (2 of 11)

3.

Turn the large green knob until you see the blue dot (this indicates that the stapler is fully open).

Figure 12-43

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (3 of 11)

4.

Turn the small green knob at the top of the stapler unit clockwise until the staple cartridge moves to the left of the stapler unit.

Figure 12-44

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (4 of 11)

CAUTION:

The blue dot must appear in the window of the stapler unit before you remove the staple cartridge. If you try to remove the staple cartridge before the blue dot appears in the window, you could damage the device.

5.

Remove the staple cartridge.

Figure 12-45

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (5 of 11)

208 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

ENWW

6.

Pull up on the lever labeled with a green dot.

Figure 12-46

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (6 of 11)

7.

Remove the damaged staple.

Figure 12-47

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (7 of 11)

8.

Press down on the lever labeled with a green dot.

Figure 12-48

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (8 of 11)

9.

Reinstall the staple cartridge.

Figure 12-49

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (9 of 11)

Clear jams 209

10.

Slide the stapler unit into the device.

Figure 12-50

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (10 of 11)

11.

Close the stapler-unit door.

Figure 12-51

Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (11 of 11)

Clear a jam in the upper half of the stapler head in the multifunction finisher

1.

Follow steps 1 through 4 of the procedure to clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher.

2.

Locate the damaged staple at the back of the stapler head, and remove the staple.

Figure 12-52

Clear a jam in the upper half of the stapler head in the multifunction finisher

3.

Follow steps 10 through 11 from the procedure to clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher.

210 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker

1.

Move the stapler/stacker away from the MFP.

Figure 12-53

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (1 of 9)

2.

Open the stapler unit door.

Figure 12-54

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (2 of 9)

3.

Pull the cartridge out.

Figure 12-55

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (3 of 9)

4.

Pull up on the lever labeled with a green dot.

Figure 12-56

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (4 of 9)

ENWW Clear jams 211

5.

Remove the damaged staple.

Figure 12-57

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (5 of 9)

6.

Press down on the lever labeled with a green dot.

Figure 12-58

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (6 of 9)

7.

Reinstall the staple cartridge.

Figure 12-59

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (7 of 9)

8.

Close the stapler unit door.

Figure 12-60

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (8 of 9)

212 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

9.

Push the stapler/stacker back into place.

Figure 12-61

Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (9 of 9)

NOTE:

The stapler needs to reload after clearing a staple jam, so the first few documents (no more than five) might not be stapled. If a print job is sent and the stapler is jammed or is out of staples, the job will still print as long as the path to the output bin is not blocked.

Clear jams in the left door (fuser area)

1.

Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.

Figure 12-62

Clear jams in the left door (1 of 4)

2.

Open the left door.

WARNING!

Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.

Figure 12-63

Clear jams in the left door (2 of 4)

3.

Remove any jammed or damaged media from this area by pulling it out of the MFP.

ENWW Clear jams 213

4.

Press down on the green tab and carefully check for media. Be sure to remove all pieces of torn media.

Figure 12-64

Clear jams in the left door (3 of 4)

5.

Close the left door. Push the output device back into place.

Figure 12-65

Clear jams in the left door (4 of 4)

Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox

1.

Move the 8-bin mailbox away from the MFP. To do this, stand on the left side of the MFP and pull the 8-bin mailbox straight toward you.

Figure 12-66

Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox (1 of 3)

2.

Carefully remove the upper (face-up) bin.

3.

Pull down the handle on the output paper module and remove any jammed paper from this area.

Figure 12-67

Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox (2 of 3)

214 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

4.

Push the 8-bin mailbox back into place, and then reattach the upper bin.

Figure 12-68

Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox (3 of 3)

NOTE:

Check that the paper used is not thicker than the 8-bin mailbox supports. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

Solve repeated jams

Situation

General repeated jam problems

Repeated jams in the ADF

Solution

1. Verify that the media is correctly loaded in the trays and that all width guides are correctly set (see

Print tasks on page 99 ).

2. Verify that the paper tray is set for the size of media installed and that the tray is not overloaded.

3. Try turning over the stack of media in the tray. If you are using prepunched or letterhead paper, try printing from tray 1.

4. Do not use previously printed media or torn, worn, or irregular media. For recommended media for your MFP, see

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

5. Check the media specifications. (See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .) If media is outside of the

recommended specifications, problems can occur.

6. MFP might be dirty. Clean the MFP as described in

Clean the MFP on page 172 .

7. Check that all damaged or jammed media is removed from MFP.

1. The ADF might be dirty. Clean the ADF as described in

Clean the ADF delivery system on page 175

.

NOTE:

If jams continue, contact your HP-authorized service provider. (See the HP support flyer or go to www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp .)

ENWW Clear jams 215

Media-handling problems

Use only media that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media

Guide. This guide is available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide .

Printer feeds multiple sheets

Printer feeds multiple sheets

Cause

The input tray is overfilled.

Print media is sticking together.

Media does not meet the specifications for this MFP.

Trays are not properly adjusted.

Solution

Remove excess media from the input tray.

Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180° or flip it over, and then reload it into the tray.

NOTE:

Do not fan media. Fanning can cause static electricity, which can cause media to stick together.

Use only media that meets HP media specifications for this

MFP.

Make sure that the rear media-length guide indicates the length of media being used.

Printer feeds incorrect page size

Printer feeds incorrect page size

Cause

The correct size media is not loaded in the input tray.

The correct size media is not selected in the software program or printer driver.

The correct size media for tray 1 is not selected in the MFP control panel.

The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Solution

Load the correct size media in the input tray.

Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer driver are correct, because the software-program settings override the printer-driver and control-panel settings, and the printer-driver settings override the control-panel settings. For

more information, see Change printer-driver settings for

Windows on page 55 .

From the control panel, select the correct size media for tray

1.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the paper.

Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Cause

You are using a driver for a different printer. For more information.

The specified tray is empty.

Solution

Use a driver for this printer.

Load media in the specified tray.

216 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Cause

The Use Requested Tray option is set to First in the Tray

Behavior sub-menu of the Device Behavior menu.

The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Solution

Change the setting to Exclusively.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Media does not feed automatically

Media does not feed automatically

Cause Solution

Manual feed is selected in the software program.

The correct size media is not loaded.

Load tray 1 with media, or, if the media is loaded, touch OK .

Load the correct size media.

The input tray is empty.

Load media into the input tray.

Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the MFP and remove any media in the paper path.

Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.

The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the paper.

Media does not feed from tray 2, 3, or 4

Media does not feed from tray 2, 3, or 4

Cause Solution

The correct size media is not loaded.

Load the correct size media and verify that the custommedia switch is in the correct position.

Load media in the input tray.

The input tray is empty.

The correct media type for the input tray is not selected in the MFP control panel.

An optional tray is incorrectly installed.

From the MFP control panel, select the correct media type for the input tray.

Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the MFP and remove any media in the paper path.

Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.

None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.

The optional trays only display as available if they are installed. Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed.

Verify that the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays.

Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the MFP.

ENWW Media-handling problems 217

Media does not feed from tray 2, 3, or 4

Cause

The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Solution

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the media size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Transparencies will not feed

Transparencies will not feed

Cause

The correct media type is not specified in the software or printer driver.

Tray 1 is overfilled.

Media in another input tray is the same size as the transparencies, and the MFP is defaulting to the other tray.

Tray 1 is not configured correctly for type.

Transparencies might not meet supported media specifications.

Solution

Verify that the correct media type is selected in the software or printer driver.

Remove excess transparencies from tray 1. Do not exceed the maximum stack height for tray 1.

Make sure that tray 1 is selected in the software program or printer driver. Use the MFP control panel to configure the tray to the media type loaded.

Make sure that tray 1 is selected in the software program or printer driver. Use the MFP control panel to configure the tray to the media type loaded.

Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this MFP.

Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP

NOTE:

Return the fuser levers to the down position after printing on envelopes. Failure to return levers to the down position for standard paper types can result in poor print quality.

Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP

Cause

Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only tray 1 can feed envelopes.

Envelopes are curled or damaged.

Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too high.

Envelope orientation is incorrect.

This MFP does not support the envelopes being used.

Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes.

Solution

Load envelopes into tray 1.

Verify that the fuser levers are in the correct position. Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled environment.

Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled environment.

Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly.

Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.

Configure tray 1 size for envelopes.

218 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Output is curled or wrinkled

Output is curled or wrinkled

Cause

Media does not meet the specifications for this MFP.

Media is damaged or in poor condition.

Printer is operating in an excessively humid environment.

You are printing large, solid-filled areas.

Media used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed moisture.

Media has poorly cut edges.

The specific media type was not configured for the tray or selected in the software.

Solution

Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this MFP.

Remove media from the input tray and load media that is in good condition.

Verify that the printing environment is within humidity specifications.

Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a different pattern.

Remove media and replace it with media from a fresh, unopened package.

Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan media. If the problem persists, replace the media.

Configure the software for the media (see the software documentation). To configure the tray for the media, see

Configure trays on page 94

.

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly

Cause

You are trying to duplex on unsupported media.

The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.

The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or letterhead.

Solution

Verify that the media is supported for duplex printing.

Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.

Load preprinted forms and letterhead in tray 1 with the letterhead or printed side up and the bottom of the page feeding into the MFP. For tray 2, 3, and 4, load these media printed side down with the top of the page toward the back of the MFP.

ENWW Media-handling problems 219

Solve print-quality problems

This section helps you define print-quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often printquality problems can be handled easily by making sure that the device is correctly maintained, using print media that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.

Print-quality problems associated with media

Some print-quality problems arise from the use of inappropriate media.

Use media that meets HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 , or see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide, which is available at

www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide .

The surface of the media is too smooth. Use media that meets HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

The moisture content is uneven, too high, or too low. Use media from a different source or from an unopened ream.

Some areas of the media reject toner. Use media from a different source or from an unopened ream.

The letterhead you are using is printed on rough media. Use a smoother, xerographic media. If this solves your problem, ask the supplier of your letterhead to use media that meets the specifications for this device. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83

.

The media is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic media.

The driver setting is incorrect. To change the media type setting, see

Change printer-driver settings for Windows on page 55

.

The media that you are using is too heavy for the media type setting that you selected, and the toner is not fusing to the media. See

Default Options for Originals on page 18

.

Print-quality problems associated with the environment

If the device is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions, verify that the printing environment is within specifications. See

Operating environment on page 256 .

Print-quality problems associated with jams

Make sure that all sheets are cleared from the paper path. See

Clear jams on page 196

.

If the device recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the device.

If the sheets do not pass through the fuser and cause image defects on subsequent documents, print three pages to clean the device. If the problem persists, print and process a cleaning page.

See

Clean the MFP on page 172 .

220 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Light print (partial page)

Figure 12-69

Light print (partial page)

1.

Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.

2.

The print cartridge might be defective. Replace the print cartridge.

3.

The media might not meet HP specifications (for example, the media is too moist or too rough).

See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

Light print (entire page)

Figure 12-70

Light print (entire page)

1.

Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.

2.

Make sure that the Economode setting is turned off at the control panel and in the printer driver.

3.

Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality menu and increase the Toner Density setting. See

Print Quality menu on page 43 .

4.

Try using a different type of media.

5.

The print cartridge might be defective. Replace the print cartridge.

ENWW Solve print-quality problems 221

Specks

Figure 12-71

Specks

Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the MFP on page 172 .

3.

Try using a different type of media.

4.

Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it.

Dropouts

Figure 12-72

Dropouts

1.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

2.

If the media is rough, and the toner easily rubs off, open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality menu, select Fuser Modes , and then select the media type you are using. See

Print Quality menu on page 43

.

3.

Try using a smoother media.

222 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Lines

Figure 12-73

Lines

A a a a a

A

A

A

A a b b b b

B

B

B

B

B b

C

C

C

C

C c c c c c A a a a a

A

A

A

A a b b b b

B

B

B

B

B b

C

C

C

C

C c c c c c

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See

Clean the MFP on page 172 .

3.

Replace the print cartridge.

Gray background

Figure 12-74

Gray background

1.

Do not use media that has already been run through the device.

2.

Try using a different type of media.

3.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

4.

Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.

5.

Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality menu, increase the Toner Density setting. See

Print Quality menu on page 43

.

6.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

7.

Replace the print cartridge.

ENWW Solve print-quality problems 223

Toner smear

Figure 12-75

Toner smear

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Verify that the fuser levers are in the down position (unless printing on envelopes).

3.

Try using a different type of media.

4.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

5.

Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the MFP on page 172 .

6.

Replace the print cartridge.

Also see Loose toner on page 224

.

Loose toner

Figure 12-76

Loose toner

Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page.

1.

Verify that the fuser levers are in the down position (unless printing on envelopes).

2.

If media is heavy or rough, open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the

Print Quality submenu, select Fuser Modes , and then select the media type you are using.

3.

If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your media, try printing on the smoother side.

4.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

5.

Make sure that type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

224 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Repeating defects

Figure 12-77

Repeating defects

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

If the distance between defects is 44 mm (1.73 in.), 53 mm (2.1 in.), 63 mm (2.5 in.), or 94 mm

(3.7 in.), the print cartridge might need to be replaced.

3.

Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See

Clean the MFP on page 172 .)

Also see

Repeating image on page 225 .

Repeating image

Figure 12-78

Repeating image

Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,

The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a w eue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaak d ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.

Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflklndjd skshkshdcnksnjcnal aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsnci j hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this is a h n. jns fir stie a d jakjd a jjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted, and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh .

Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d

.a t fhjdjht ajshef . Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk sjskrplo book . C amegaj d sand their djnln as orged tyehha as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmda l vlala tojk. Ho sn shj shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjn v hv vh a efve r

Tehreh ahk j vaknihidh wa s skjsaa a dhkjfn an j cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w a sj kskjnkas sa fjkank cak ajhjkn eanjsd n qa e jhc p jtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana l, and the a skeina of ahthvnasm . Sayhvjan tjhhjhrajn ve fh k v nja vkfkahjd a . Smakkljl a s ehiah adheuf h if you do klakc k w vka ah call lthe c jakha a a d a s d fijs.

Sincerel y,

Mr. Scmehnjcj

Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,

The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a w eue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaak d ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.

Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflklndjd skshkshdcnksnjcnal aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsnci j hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this is a h n. jns fir stie a d jakjd a jjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted, and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh .

Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d

.a t fhjdjht ajshef . Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk sjskrplo book . C amegaj d sand their djnln as orged tyehha as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmda l vlala tojk. Ho sn shj shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjn v hv vh a efve r

Tehreh ahk j vaknihidh wa s skjsaa a dhkjfn an j cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w a sj kskjnkas sa fjkank cak ajhjkn eanjsd n qa e jhc p jtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana l, and the a skeina of ahthvnasm . Sayhvjan tjhhjhrajn ve fh k v nja vkfkahjd a . Smakkljl a s ehiah adheuf h if you do klakc k w vka ah call lthe c jakha a a d a s d fijs.

Sincerel y,

Mr. Scmehnjcj

This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow media.

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

3.

If the distance between defects is 44 mm (1.73 in.), 53 mm (2.1 in.), 63 mm (2.5 in.), or 94 mm

(3.7 in.), the print cartridge might need to be replaced.

ENWW Solve print-quality problems 225

Misformed characters

Figure 12-79

Misformed characters

AaBbCc

AaBbCc

AaBbCc

AaBbCc

AaBbCc

AaBbCc

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

Page skew

Figure 12-80

Page skew

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Verify that no torn pieces of media are inside the device.

3.

Make sure that media is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. See Load paper and print media on page 87 . Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too

loose against the media.

4.

Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.

5.

Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

6.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. (See Operating environment on page 256

.)

7.

Perform a tray alignment by opening the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, touch Set Registration . Choose a tray under Source and then run a test page. For more information, see

Print Quality menu on page 43

.

226 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Curl or wave

Figure 12-81

Curl or wave

1.

Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.

2.

Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. (See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .)

3.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. (See Operating environment on page 256

.)

4.

Try printing to a different output bin.

5.

If media is lightweight and smooth, open the Administration menu at the device control panel.

On the Print Quality submenu, touch Fuser Modes , and then select the media type you are using. Change the setting to Low , which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.

Wrinkles or creases

Figure 12-82

Wrinkles or creases

ENWW

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

3.

Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.

4.

Make sure that media is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made. See

Load paper and print media on page 87 .

5.

Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

6.

If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.

If the above actions do not improve wrinkles or creases, open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, select Fuser Modes , and then select the media type you are using. Change the setting to Low , which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.

Solve print-quality problems 227

Vertical white lines

Figure 12-83

Vertical white lines

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

3.

Replace the print cartridge.

Tire tracks

Figure 12-84

Tire tracks

A a a a a

A

A

A

A a b b b b

B

B

B

B

B b

C

C

C

C

C c c c c c A a a a a

A

A

A

A a b b b b

B

B

B

B

B b

C

C

C

C

C c c c c c

This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its rated life. For example, if you are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage.

1.

Replace the print cartridge.

2.

Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage.

White spots on black

Figure 12-85

White spots on black

1.

Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.

2.

Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

228 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

3.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

4.

Replace the print cartridge.

Scattered lines

Figure 12-86

Scattered lines

1.

Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

3.

Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.

4.

Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality submenu and change the Toner Density setting. See

Print Quality menu on page 43 .

Blurred print

Figure 12-87

Blurred print

ENWW

1.

Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

2.

Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See

Operating environment on page 256

.

3.

Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.

4.

Do not use media that already has been run through the device.

5.

Decrease the toner density. Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality submenu and change the Toner Density setting. See

Print Quality menu on page 43 .

Solve print-quality problems 229

Random image repetition

Figure 12-88

Random image repetition (1 of 2)

Figure 12-89

Random image repetition (2 of 2)

If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down the page (in a gray field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job. (The repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.)

Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in.

Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image at the top of the page, and the darker image farther down the page.

From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first.

If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the device off for 10 minutes, and then turn it on to restart the print job.

230 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Solve fax problems

For help solving fax problems, see the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax

Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide, which are included on the software CD that came with the fax accessory.

You can also go to http://www.hp.com/go/mfpfaxaccessory300 .

ENWW Solve fax problems 231

Solve copy problems

Prevent copy problems

The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:

Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the automatic document feeder (ADF).

Use quality originals.

Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear images and problems with the OCR program. See

Load paper and print media on page 87

for instructions.

Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.

Image problems

Problem

Images are missing or faded.

Vertical white or faded stripes appear on the copy.

Unwanted lines appear on the copy.

Black dots or streaks appear on the copy.

Copies are too light or dark.

Text is unclear.

Cause

The print cartridge might be defective.

The original might be of poor quality.

The original might have a colored background.

The media might not meet

HP specifications.

The print cartridge might be defective.

The flatbed scanner or the ADF glass might be dirty.

The photosensitive drum inside the print cartridge might have been scratched.

Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the automatic document feeder (ADF) or flatbed scanner.

The darkness setting needs to be adjusted.

The sharpness setting needs to be adjusted.

Solution

Replace the print cartridge. See

Manage supplies on page 182

.

If your original is too light or damaged, the copy might not be able to compensate, even if you adjust the darkness. If possible, find an original document in better condition.

Touch Copy , and then touch Image

Adjustment.

Adjust the Background

Cleanup slider to the right to decrease the background.

Use media that meets

HP specifications. See

Supported paper and print media sizes on page 83 .

Replace the print cartridge. See

Manage supplies on page 182

.

Clean the flatbed scanner or the ADF

glass. See Clean the MFP on page 172

.

Install a new HP print cartridge. See

Manage supplies on page 182

.

Clean the device. See

Clean the MFP on page 172 .

Touch Copy , and then touch Image

Adjustment.

Adjust the Darkness slider to lighten or darken the image.

To adjust the sharpness, touch Copy , and then touch Image Adjustment.

232 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Problem Cause Solution

The image should be optimized for text.

Adjust the Sharpness slider to the right to increase the sharpness.

To optimize the image for text, touch

Copy and then touch Optimize Text/

Picture . Select Text .

Media-handling problems

Problem

Poor print quality or toner adhesion

Dropouts, jamming, or curl

Excessive curl

Jamming, damage to device

Problems with feeding

Cause Solution

The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy or too smooth, or it is embossed or from a faulty paper lot.

The fuser levers are not in the correct position.

Try another kind of paper, between 100 and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture content. Use only media that meets the specifications outlined in the

HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media

Guide. This guide is available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide .

The paper varies from side-to-side.

The paper has cutouts or perforations.

Verify that the fuser levers are in the down position (unless printing on envelopes).

The paper has been stored incorrectly.

Store paper flat in its moisture-proof wrapping.

Turn the paper over.

The paper has variability from one side to the other.

The paper is too moist, has the wrong grain direction, or is of short-grain construction

Try changing the fuser mode (see

Quality menu on page 43

grain paper.

Print

or use long-

Turn the paper over.

Use paper that is free of cutouts or perforations.

The paper has ragged edges.

The paper varies from side-to-side.

The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy or too smooth, has the wrong grain direction, or is of short-grain construction or it is embossed or from a faulty paper lot.

Use high-quality paper that is made for laser printers.

Turn the paper over.

Try another kind of paper, between 100 and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture content.

Use long-grain paper.

ENWW Solve copy problems 233

Problem Cause Solution

Print is crooked or misaligned on the page.

The media guides might be incorrectly adjusted.

Remove all media from the input tray, straighten the stack, and then load the media in the input tray again. Adjust the media guides to the width and length of the media that you are using and try printing again.

The scanner might require a calibration.

Perform a tray alignment and then calibrate the scanner.

Perform a tray alignment by opening the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the

Print Quality submenu, touch Set

Registration . Choose a tray under

Source and then run a test page.

For more information, see

Print

Quality menu on page 43

.

See

Calibrate the scanner on page 180 for information about

calibrating the scanner.

More than one sheet feeds at one time.

The media tray might be overloaded.

The device does not pull media from a media tray.

The media might be wrinkled, folded, or damaged.

The device might be in manual feed mode.

The pickup roller might be dirty or damaged.

The paper-length adjustment control in the tray is set at a length that is greater than the media size.

Remove some of the media from the tray. See

Load paper and print media on page 87 .

Verify that the media is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. Try printing on media from a new or different package.

If Manual Feed appears on the control-panel display, press OK to print the job.

Verify that the device is not in manual feed mode, and then print your job again.

Contact HP Customer Care. See

HP Customer Care on page 250 or the

support flyer that came in the device box.

Adjust the paper-length adjustment control to the correct length.

234 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Performance problems

Problem

No copy came out.

Copies are blank.

The wrong original was copied.

Copies are reduced in size.

Cause

The input tray might be empty.

The original might have been loaded incorrectly.

The sealing tape might not have been properly removed from the cartridge.

The original might have been loaded incorrectly.

The media might not meet

HP specifications.

The print cartridge is defective.

The ADF might be loaded.

The device software settings might be set to reduce the scanned image.

Solution

Load media in the device.

Load the original face down in the ADF or flatbed scanner.

Replace the print cartridge and return the defective cartridge.

Load the original face down in the ADF or flatbed scanner.

Use media that meets HP specifications.

Replace the print cartridge.

Make sure that the ADF is empty.

See the device software Help for more information about changing the settings.

ENWW Solve copy problems 235

Solve e-mail problems

If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to reconfigure the

SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a configuration page to find the current

SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. See Information pages on page 152 . Use the following

procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid.

Validate the SMTP gateway address

NOTE:

This procedure is for Windows operating systems.

1.

Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click Start, click Run, and then type cmd

.

2.

Type telnet

followed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is the port over which the MFP is communicating. For example, type telnet 123.123.123.123

25

where "123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway address.

3.

Press Enter . If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, the response contains the message

Could not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect Failed.

4.

If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.

Validate the LDAP gateway address

NOTE:

This procedure is for Windows operating systems.

1.

Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type

LDAP://

immediately followed by the LDAP gateway address. For example, type

LDAP://12.12.12.12

where "12.12.12.12" represents the LDAP gateway address.

2.

Press Enter . If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the Find People dialog box opens.

3.

If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.

236 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Solve network connectivity problems

If the MFP is having problems communicating with the network, use the information in this section to resolve the problem.

Solve network printing problems

NOTE:

HP recommends that you use the MFP CD to install and set up the MFP on a network.

Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the formatter RJ45 connector.

Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter RJ45 connector is lit and is flashing.

Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Information pages on page 152 ). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints

a second page that shows the network settings and status.

NOTE:

The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX,

Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocols and network parameters are set correctly.

On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:

Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready".

Protocol status is "Ready".

An IP address is listed.

The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you are not sure which method is correct.

Try printing the job from another computer.

To verify that a MFP works with a computer, use a parallel cable to connect it directly to a computer. You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.

Contact your network administrator for assistance.

Verify communication over the network

If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the MFP, use this procedure to verify that you can communicate with the MFP over the network.

1.

Windows: Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd

. An MS-DOS command prompt opens.

-or-

Mac: Click Applications, click Utilities, and then open the Terminal application. The terminal window opens.

2.

Type ping

followed by the IP address. For example, type ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

where

"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IPv4 address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect configuration page.

If the MFP is communicating over the network, the response is a list of replies from the MFP.

3.

Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address resolution protocol (arp -a) command. At the prompt, type arp -a

. Find the IP address in the

ENWW Solve network connectivity problems 237

list and compare its physical address to the hardware address that is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration. If the addresses match, all network communications are valid.

4.

If you cannot verify that the MFP is communicating over the network, contact the network administrator.

238 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

Solve common Macintosh problems

This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS X.

Table 12-1 Problems with Mac OS X

The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

Cause

The printer software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly.

The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.

Solution

Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:

Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/

<lang>.lproj

, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.

Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder:

Library/

Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj

, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.

The printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host name does not appear in the printer list in the Print Center or Printer

Setup Utility.

Cause

The printer might not be ready.

Solution

The wrong connection type might be selected.

The wrong printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host name is being used.

The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.

Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on, and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port.

Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Rendezvous is selected, depending on the type of connection that exists between the printer and the computer.

Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.

The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

Cause Solution

The printer might not be ready.

The printer software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly.

Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on, and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port.

Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:

Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/

<lang>.lproj

, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.

ENWW Solve common Macintosh problems 239

Table 12-1 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)

The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

Cause

The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.

The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.

Solution

Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder:

Library/

Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj

, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.

Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.

A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted.

Cause

The print queue might be stopped.

The wrong printer name or IP address is being used. Another printer with the same or similar name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name might have received your print job.

Solution

Restart the print queue. Open print monitor and select Start Jobs.

Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

An encapsulated postscript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.

Cause

This problem occurs with some programs.

Solution

Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to the printer before printing.

Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.

You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.

Cause Solution

This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not installed. When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple

USB Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this software is available from the Apple Web site.

When connected with a USB cable, the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.

Cause Solution

This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware component.

Software troubleshooting

Check that your Macintosh supports USB.

Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac

OS X v10.1 or later.

Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software from Apple.

240 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

When connected with a USB cable, the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.

Cause Solution

Hardware troubleshooting

Check that the printer is turned on.

Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.

Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.

Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer.

Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer.

NOTE:

The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.

ENWW Solve common Macintosh problems 241

242 Chapter 12 Problem solve ENWW

A Supplies and accessories

This section provides information about ordering parts, supplies, and accessories. Use only parts and accessories that are specifically designed for this device.

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Part numbers

ENWW 243

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Several methods are available for ordering parts, supplies, and accessories:

Order directly from HP

Order through service or support providers

Order directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to a network)

Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software

Order directly from HP

You can obtain the following items directly from HP:

Replacement parts: To order replacement parts in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/hpparts .

Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center.

Supplies and accessories: To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies . To order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html

. To order accessories, go to www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp .

Order through service or support providers

To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to a network)

Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server.

1.

In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address or host name of the device. The status window opens.

2.

In the Other links area, double-click Order Supplies. This provides a URL for a site from which you can purchase consumables.

3.

Select the part numbers that you want to order, and follow the instructions on the screen.

Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software

HP Easy Printer Care software is a printer management tool designed to make printer configuration, monitoring, supplies ordering, troubleshooting, and updating as simple and efficient as possible. For more information about HP Easy Printer Care software, go to www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare .

244 Appendix A Supplies and accessories ENWW

Part numbers

Type of item

Paper handling

Printing supplies

Memory

Item Description or use Order number

3,000-sheet stacker

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker

One 3,000-sheet stacking device. The device also offers job offset capabilities.

One 3,000-sheet stacking device provides stapling for as many as 50 sheets of paper per document. The device also offers job offset capabilities.

C8084A

C8085A

Multifunction finisher

8-bin mailbox

Finishing device that provides 1,000 sheets of stacker capacity, stapling, for up to 50 sheets of paper, and folding saddle-stitching for booklets up to 10 sheets of paper.

A device that provides a face-up bin (upper bin) and eight face-down bins that can be assigned to individual users or workgroups. The device also functions as a job separator, stacker, and sorter/collator.

Replacement HP maximum capacity, smart print cartridge.

C8088B

Q5693A

Print cartridge (average of

30,000 pages in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752)

Staple cartridge

C8543X

Replacement HP 5,000 staple cartridge for the 3,000sheet stapler/stacker.

C8091A

C8092A Staple cartridge

SDRAM Double Data Rate

(DDR) memory DIMMs (100pin)

Replacement HP 5,000 staple cartridge for the multifunction finisher.

The MFP has two memory

DIMM slots. One is used by factory-installed memory.

Q7715A (64 MB)

Q7718A (128 MB)

Improves the ability of the

MFP to handle large and stored jobs (maximum 512

MB with HP brand DDR

DIMMs).

Q7719A (256 MB)

Q7720A (512 MB)

ENWW Part numbers 245

Type of item Item Description or use

Cable and interface accessories

Enhanced EIO Cards HP Jetdirect Connectivity

Card for USB, serial, and

LocalTalk connectivity

HP Jetdirect 615N Print

Server for Fast Ethernet

(10/100Base-TX) networks

(RJ-45 only)

HP 680N Wireless 802.11b

connectivity

HP Jetdirect 625N Print

Server for Fast Ethernet

(10/100/1000Base-TX networks)

Analog fax

Additional software features HP Digital Sending Software A software accessory with enhanced digital sending features including network authentication.

Maintenance kit Printer maintenance kit

A customer-installable accessory that enables the

MFP to function as a standalone analog fax machine.

The kit contains two Type 1 rollers, seven Type 2 rollers, one transfer roller assembly, and one fuser assembly.

Order number

J4135A

J6057A

J6058A

J7960A

Q3701A

T196AA

C9152A (110 volt)

C9153A (220 volt)

246 Appendix A Supplies and accessories ENWW

B Service and support

Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement

HP PRODUCT

HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP

DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY

One-year on-site warranty

HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.

HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.

HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.

HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.

Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO

OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND

HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,

SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE

YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR

ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,

ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 247

CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN

CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY

PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY

STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.

Customer self repair warranty service

HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period,

HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.

Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to

HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used.

248 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

Print cartridge limited warranty statement

This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.

This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the device product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.

To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO

OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR

IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE

LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT

OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.

THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT

LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION

TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT

TO YOU.

ENWW Print cartridge limited warranty statement 249

HP Customer Care

Online Services

For 24-hour access to updated HP device-specific software, product information, and support information through an Internet connection, go to the Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp .

Go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about the HP Jetdirect external print server.

HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop computing and printing products. Go to instantsupport.hp.com

.

Telephone support

HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. For the telephone number for your country/region, see the flyer that shipped with the device, or visit www.hp.com/support . Before calling

HP, have the following information ready: the product name and serial number, the date of purchase, and a description of the problem.

Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information

www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp_software or www.hp.com/go/ljm9050mfp_software

The Web page for the drivers is in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in several languages.

HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies

United States: www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies

Canada: www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies

Europe: www.hp.com/supplies

Asia-Pacific: www.hp.com/paper

To order genuine HP parts or accessories, go to the HP Parts Store at www.hp.com/buy/parts (U.S.

and Canada only), or call 1-800-538-8787 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3154 (Canada).

HP service information

To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call 1-800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3867 (Canada).

Outside the United States and Canada, call the customer support number for your country/region.

See the flyer that shipped in the box with the device.

HP service agreements

Call 1-800-HPINVENT (1-800-474-6836 (U.S.)) or 1-800-268-1221 (Canada). Or, go to the HP

SupportPack and Carepaq

TM

Services Web site at www.hpexpress-services.com/10467a .

For extended service, call 1-800-446-0522.

250 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

HP Easy Printer Care

To check the device status and settings and view troubleshooting information and online documentation, use the HP Easy Printer Care. You must have performed a full software installation in order to use the HP Easy Printer Care. See

HP Easy Printer Care on page 158 .

HP support and information for Macintosh computers

Go to www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription service for driver updates.

Go to www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products that are designed specifically for the Macintosh user.

ENWW HP Customer Care 251

252 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

C Specifications

Physical specifications

Electrical specifications

Acoustic emissions

Operating environment

ENWW 253

Physical specifications

Table C-1 Dimensions

Model Height

HP LaserJet M9040 MFP

1

HP LaserJet M9050 MFP

Without print cartridge

1219 mm (48 in.)

1219 mm (48 in.)

Depth

1085 mm (43 in.)

1085 mm (43 in.)

Width

1334 mm (53 in.)

1334 mm (53 in.)

Weight

1

143 kg (317 lb)

143 kg (317 lb)

Table C-2 Dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened

Model Height

HP LaserJet M9040 MFP

HP LaserJet M9050 MFP

1664 mm (66 in.)

1664 mm (66 in.)

Depth

1296 mm (52 in.)

1296 mm (52 in.)

Width

2501 mm (98.5 in.)

2501 mm (98.5 in.)

254 Appendix C Specifications ENWW

Electrical specifications

WARNING!

Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the device and void the product warranty.

Table C-3 Power requirements

Specification 110-volt models 220-volt models

Power requirements

Rated current

100 to 127 Vac

50/60 Hz

12 Amps

220 to 240 Vac

50/60 Hz

5.3 Amps

Table C-4

Power consumption (average, in watts) 1

Model

Printing

2

Copying

2

Ready or standby

,4

Sleep 1

3

,

5

Sleep 2 Off

HP LaserJet M9040 MFP 1070 W 1120 W 305 W 221 W 59 W 0.9 W

1

4

5

2

3

HP LaserJet M9050 MFP 1130 W 1160 W 305 W 221 W 59 W 0.9 W

Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp/regulatory or www.hp.com/go/ljm9050mfp/ regulatory for current information.

Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.

Default time from Ready mode to Sleep 1 = 15 minutes, and to Sleep 2 = 90 minutes (HP LaserJet M9050 MFP) , 60 minutes (HP LaserJet M9040 MDP).

Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 1045 BTU/hour (HP LaserJet M9050 MFP), 1045 BTU/hour (HP LaserJet M9040 MFP).

Recovery time from Sleep to start of printing = 20 seconds, and from Sleep 2 to start of printing = 145 seconds.

ENWW Electrical specifications 255

Acoustic emissions

Table C-5

Sound power level

1

,

2

Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296

Printing

3

L

WAd

= 7.4 Bels (A) [74 dB(A)]

1

2

3

Ready Essentially Inaudible

Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp/regulatory or www.hp.com/go/ljm9050mfp/ regulatory for current information.

Configuration tested: Base unit printing and scanning continuous with ADF on A4 paper with no output device.

Print speed is 50 ipm HP LaserJet M9050 MFP and 40 ipm HP LaserJet M9040 MFP.

Table C-6 Sound pressure level

1

,

2

Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296

Printing/Copying

3

L pAm

=58 dB (A)

1

2

3

Ready Essentially Inaudible

Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp for current information.

Configuration tested: Base unit printing and scanning continuous with ADF on A4 paper with no output device.

Print speed is 50 ipm HP LaserJet M9050 MFP and 40 ipm HP LaserJet M9040 MFP.

Operating environment

Table C-7 Necessary conditions

Environmental condition Recommended

Temperature (device and print cartridge) 17.5° to 25.0°C (63° to 77°F)

Relative humidity 30% to 70%

Allowed

0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)

0% to 95%

NOTE:

Optimum performance of the device is assured under the recommended temperature and humidity specifications. Print quality might deteriorate and occurrences of paper jams might increase when the device is operated withing the allowed temperature and humidity specifications.

256 Appendix C Specifications ENWW

D Regulatory information

ENWW 257

FCC regulations

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase separation between equipment and receiver.

Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.

Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.

NOTE:

Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.

258 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Environmental product stewardship program

Protecting the environment

Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.

Ozone production

This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O

3

).

Power consumption

Power usage drops significantly while in Ready/Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY

STAR® qualification status for this product see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet.

Qualified products are also listed at: http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdesign/ecolabels.html

Toner consumption

Economode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.

Paper use

This product’s manual/optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing

(multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.

Plastics

Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.

ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 259

HP LaserJet print supplies

It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with

HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new

HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately.

HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!

NOTE:

Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/recycle .

Return and recycling instructions

United States and Puerto Rico

The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.

Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges)

1.

Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.

2.

Tape up to eight single boxes together using strapping or packaging tape (up to 70 lbs).

3.

Use a single pre-paid shipping label.

OR

1.

Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from the http://www.hp.com/ recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to eight HP LaserJet print cartridges).

2.

Use a single pre-paid shipping label.

Single returns

1.

Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.

2.

Place the shipping label on the front of the box.

Shipping

For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit http://www.ups.com

. If you are returning via USPS label, give the package to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S.Postal Service Office. For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to change without notice.

260 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Non-US returns

To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new printer supply item) or visit http://www.hp.com/recycle . Select your country/region for information on how to return your

HP LaserJet printing supplies.

Paper

This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the

HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.

ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 261

Material restrictions

This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the scanner and/or control panel liquid crystal display that may require special handling at end-of-life.

This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:

HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 device

Type

Weight

Location

User-removable

Carbon monofluoride lithium battery BR1632

1.5 g

On formatter board

No

For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle , or contact your local authorities or the

Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org

.

Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the

European Union

This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.

262 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/ hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment .

For more information

To obtain information about these environmental topics:

Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products

HP’s commitment to the environment

HP’s environmental management system

HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program

Material Safety Data Sheets

Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment .

ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 263

Country/region specific statements

Declaration of Conformity

Declaration of Conformity

according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1

Manufacturer's Name:

Manufacturer's Address:

Hewlett-Packard Company

11311 Chinden Boulevard,

Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA

declares, that the product

Product Name:

Including:

HP LaserJet M9040/ M9050 MFP series

2000 sheet input feed unit (C8531A)

8-bin mailbox (Q5693A)(GUADA-0401-00)

Regulatory Model 2) :

Product Options:

Toner Cartridge

BOISB-0403-01

All

C8543X

conforms to the following Product Specifications:

Safety:

EMC:

IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 + A11

IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)

GB4943-2001

CISPR22:2005 / EN 55022:2006 - Class A

1, 3)

EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2

EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1

EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2

FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A / ICES-003, Issue 4

GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003

Supplementary Information:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.

This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation.

1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.

2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).

3) “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures”.

Boise, Idaho , USA

23 July 2007

For regulatory topics only,

European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards

Europe, Herrenberger Straáe 140,, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143), www.hp.com/go/ certificates

USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160,, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015,

USA, (Phone: 208-396-6000)

Laser safety

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is

264 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance

Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.

WARNING!

Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.

Canadian DOC regulations

Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.

« Conforme la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagntiques. « CEM ». »

VCCI statement (Japan)

Power cord statement (Japan)

EMI statement (Korea)

EMI statement (Taiwan)

Laser statement for Finland

Luokan 1 laserlaite

Klass 1 Laser Apparat

ENWW Country/region specific statements 265

HP LaserJet M9040, M9050, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.

Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.

Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.

VAROITUS !

Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.

VARNING !

Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

HUOLTO

HP LaserJet M9040, M9050 - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita.

Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.

VARO !

Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.

VARNING !

Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:

Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.

266 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Index

Symbols/Numerics

3000-sheet stacker

capacity 5

features 8

ordering 245

3000-sheet stapler/stacker

bins 96

capacity 5

jams, clearing 202

ordering 245

selecting output location 97

staple cartridge, ordering 245

staple jams, clearing 211

stapling documents 8

500-sheet input tray

models including 2

8-bin mailbox

bins 96

capacity 5

features 10

jams, clearing 214

ordering 245

A

A4 paper settings 41

accessories

locating 7

ordering 244, 245

accounting hardware 167

acoustic specifications 256

activity log, fax 153

address book, e-mail

deleting addresses 142

address books, e-mail

adding addresses 141

clearing 47

recipient lists 141 recipient lists, creating 141

address books, e-mail

auto-complete function 140

LDAP support 136

address, printer

Macintosh, troubleshooting 239

ADF

sizes supported 139

ADF (automatic document feeder)

capacity 5

cleaning the delivery

system 175

cleaning the rollers 177

cleaning the top glass strip 176

locating 7

adhesive labels

printing 87

Administration menu, control

panel 15

advanced printing options

Windows 105

alerts, e-mail 66

alignment settings, trays 43

alternative letterhead mode 105

AppleTalk setting 79

AppleTalk settings 30

Attention light

locating 12

authorized dealers 250

automatic document feeder (ADF)

cleaning the rollers 177 misfeeds 177

automatic two-sided printing path

copying documents 126

auxiliary connection

configuration 75

B

batteries included 262

billing codes report, fax 153

bins

capacities 5

default settings 23

locating 96 multifunction finisher 96

selecting 97

blank copies, problem-solving 235

blocked fax list, printing 153

blurred print, problem-solving 229

Bonjour Settings 66

booklet bin, multifunction

finisher 96

booklets, creating 9

books

copying 130

both sides, copying

default settings 18

both sides, printing on

blank pages default settings 40

default settings 23

Macintosh settings 65

browser requirements

embedded Web server 154

buttons, control panel

locating 12

sounds, settings 39

touchscreen 14

C

calibrating scanner 180

call report, fax 153

Canadian DOC regulations 265

canceling

copy jobs 132

printing 112 canceling a print request 112

capacity

bins 4

cards, EIO

ordering 246

ENWW Index 267

cartridges

management menu 26

ordering through embedded

Web server 157

recycling 260

warranty 249

cartridges, print

Macintosh status 71

ordering 245

cartridges, staple empty, stop or continue

settings 108

jams, clearing from stapler/

stacker 211

loading 108

characters, misformed 226

checking toner level

HP Easy Printer Care

software 183

cleaning

ADF delivery system 175

glass 174

MFP 172, 174 paper path 172

touch-screen 174

clearing jams

stapler head 210

clock

setting 171

clothing, washing toner off 173

collating copies 129

colored text

print as black 105

configuration page

Information menu 17

Macintosh 65

printing 152

configurations, models 2

connectivity

auxiliary 75

USB 74

contacting HP 250

control panel

Administration menu 15

buttons 12

cleaning page, printing 172

copy-screen 122

Default Job Options menu 17

default settings 39

Device Behavior menu 39

E-mail Setup menu 38

e-mail screen 138

Fax Setup menu 35

help 14

Home screen 13

Information menu 16

Initial Setup menu 27

key press sounds, default

settings 39

lights 12

locating 7

locking menus 170

maintenance messages,

resetting 184

Management menu 26

messages, numerical list 195

messages, types of 194

Print Quality menu 43

Resets menu 47

Send Setup menu 38

Service menu 47

settings 54, 66

Time/Scheduling menu 24

touchscreen buttons 14

troubleshooting 193

controlling print jobs 94

copies, number of

Windows 105

Copitrak devices 167

copying

books 130

canceling 132

collating 129

control-panel navigation 122

default settings 18, 19

features 4, 121

interrupting jobs 40

Job Mode 131

media, problem-solving 233

multiple originals 131

photos 130

problem-solving 235

problems, preventing 232 quality, problem-solving 232

size, problem-solving 235

two-sided documents 126

Courier font settings 41

cover pages 68, 102

creased paper, problem-

solving 227

crooked pages 226

curled paper, problem-

solving 227, 233

custom paper sizes 85

custom-size paper

default settings 23

custom-size paper settings

Macintosh 68

customer support embedded Web server

links 157

HP Printer Utility pages 65

online 250

D

dark copying 232

Data light

locating 12

date, setting 24, 171

Default Job Options menu 17

default settings

copy 19

Device Behavior menu 39

e-mail 21

originals 18

print 23

Resets menu 47

Send to Folder 22

delay, sleep 189

density

problem-solving 221

settings 43, 65

Device Behavior menu 39

device status

Macintosh Services tab 71

diagnostics

networks 30

digital faxing 150

digital sending

about 135, 139

address books 141

configuring e-mail 136

control-panel settings 138

default settings 22

folders 144

job settings 143

LDAP support 136

loading documents 139

recipient lists 141

sending documents 139

268 Index ENWW

Setup menu 38

SMTP support 136

troubleshooting 193

validating gateway

addresses 236

workflow 145

Digital Sending tab, embedded

Web server 156

DIMMs

expansion options 3

installing 185

ordering 245

slots 185

verifying installation 188

Disk Erase feature 168

disposal, end-of-life 262

DLC/LLC settings 30

document feeder copying two-sided

documents 126

doors

jam locations 196

left, clearing jams 213

locating 7

right, clearing jams 199

dots per inch (dpi) 3

dots, problem-

solving 222, 228, 232

double-sided copying

default settings 18

double-sided printing blank pages, default

settings 40

default settings 23

Macintosh settings 65

dpi, settings 43, 65

drivers

Macintosh settings 68

Macintosh, troubleshooting 239

presets (Macintosh) 68

settings 54, 55, 66

shortcuts (Windows) 102

supported 51

universal 52

Windows, opening 102

dropouts, problem-solving 222

duplex printing

Windows 103

duplex printing accessory

locating 7

duplexer

Macintosh settings 65

duplexing blank pages, default

settings 40

copying documents 126

default settings 23

duty cycle 3

E

e-mail

about 135, 139

address books 141

configuring 136

default settings 21

sending documents 139

troubleshooting 193

validating gateway

addresses 236

e-mail alerts 66

E-mail Setup menu 38

Economode 43

economy settings 189

EIO cards

included 5

ordering 246

slots, locating 7

EIO disk

features 6

locking 169

electrical specifications 255

embedded Web server

assigning a password 167

checking toner level 183

features 154

end-of-life disposal 262

energy specifications 255

envelopes

jams 218

printing 113

wrinkled, problem-solving 227

environment for device

problem-solving 220

environment for printer

specifications 256

environment, specifications 183

environmental stewardship

program 259

EPS files, troubleshooting 240

Equitrac devices 167

erasing hard disk 168

Error button, control panel

touchscreen 14

error messages

default settings 39

e-mail alerts 66

maintenance, resetting 184

numerical list 195

types of 194

Ethernet support 5

European Union, waste

disposal 262

Explorer, versions supported

embedded Web server 154

e-mail

address books 141

auto-complete function 140

control-panel settings 138

job settings 143

LDAP support 136

loading documents 139

recipient lists 141

sending documents 139

SMTP support 136

F

fans, troubleshooting 193

FastRes 3

fax accessory

connecting phone line 148

printing schedule 25

Fax Activity Log

clearing 47

fax card, ordering 246

fax reports, printing 17, 153

Fax Setup menu 35

faxing, digital 150

FCC regulations 258

features 2

feeding problems, media 233

file directory, printing 152

File Upload, Macintosh 65

Finnish laser safety statement 265

firmware

updates 6

Firmware Update, Macintosh 65

first page

speed, specifications 3

use different paper 68

ENWW Index 269

flash memory

upgrading 185

folders

default settings 22

sending to 144

fonts

Courier settings 41

EPS files, troubleshooting 240

list, printing 17, 153

Upload Macintosh 65

Foreign Interface Harness

(FIH) 167

front door

jam locations 196

locating 7

FTP, sending to 145

fuser

modes 43

warranty 249

G

gateways

configuring 136

testing 137

validating addresses 236

glass

sizes supported 139

graphical display, control panel 12

gray background, problem-

solving 223

H

hard disk

erasing 168

held jobs 116

Help button, control panel

touchscreen 14 help, control panel 14

Home button, control panel

touchscreen 14

Home screen, control panel 13

HP Customer Care 250

HP Digital Sending software,

ordering 246

HP Easy Printer Care

description 58 downloading 58

opening 158 options 158

supported browsers 58

supported operating

systems 58

HP Easy Printer Care Software

using 158

HP Easy Printer Care software

using 158, 183

HP fraud hotline 182

HP Instant Support Professional

Edition (ISPE) 250

HP Jetdirect print server

configuring 79

models including 2

settings 27

HP Printer Utility 65

HP Universal Print Driver 52

HP Web Jetadmin

checking toner level 183

HP-Authorized Dealers 250

HP-UX software 60

humidity

problem-solving 220

specifications 256

humidity requirements 183

I

I/O configuration

network configuration 76

settings 27

image quality

copy, improving 232 copy, problem-solving 232

settings 43

image reptition, problem-

solving 230

images per minute 3

inactivity timeout 39

Information menu 16

information pages 152

Information tab, embedded Web

server 155

Initial Setup menu 27

installing

Macintosh software for direct

connections 62, 63

Macintosh software on

networks 63, 64

memory 185

printer maintenance kit 184

Instant Support Professional

Edition (ISPE) 250

Internet Explorer, versions supported

embedded Web server 154

Internet fax 150

IP address

changing 76

Macintosh, troubleshooting 239

IPX/SPX setting 30, 78

J

jams

envelopes 218

frequent 215

locations 196

print quality after 220

recovery settings 39

trays, clearing 199

jams, paper multifunction

finisher 204, 205, 206

preventing 87

stacker or stapler/stacker 202

jams, staple

stapler/stacker 211

Japanese VCCI statement 265

Jetadmin, HP Web 58, 161

Jetdirect print server

configuring 79

models including 2

settings 27

Job Mode, copying 131

job storage

accessing 116 features 116

Macintosh settings 71

personal 117

proof and hold 116

QuickCopy 118

settings 26

stored 119

jobs

Macintosh settings 65

K

keys, control panel

locating 12

sounds, settings 39

touchscreen 14

270 Index ENWW

Korean EMI statement 265

L

LAN connector 5

LAN fax 150

landscape orientation

setting, Windows 103

language

default, setting 39

language, control panel 193

language, printer

default settings 41

laser safety statements 264, 265

LDAP servers

connecting to 136

validating gateway

addresses 236

letterhead paper, loading 105

light copying 232

light print

problem-solving 221

lights

control panel 12

lines, problem-solving

copies 232

link speed settings 33

Linux software 60

loading documents, sizes

supported 139 scanner glass 139 sizes supported 139

staples 108

LocalTalk connection 5

Lock Resources, Macintosh 65

locking

control panel menus 170

loose toner, problem-solving 224

M

Macintosh

AppleTalk settings 30

driver settings 66, 68

drivers, troubleshooting 239

HP Printer Utility 65

installing printing system for

direct connections 62, 63

installing printing system for

networks 63, 64

problems, troubleshooting 239

removing software 67

resize documents 68

software 62

staple options 70

support 251

supported operating

systems 62

USB card, troubleshooting 240

Macintosh driver settings

custom-size paper 68

Job Storage 71

Services tab 71

watermarks 69

maintenance kit

ordering 246

Management menu 26

margins

registration, setting 43

material restrictions 262

Material Safety Data Sheet

(MSDS) 263

media

A4 settings 41

curled 227, 233

custom, loading 92

custom-size, Macintosh

settings 68

default size, selecting 23

first page 68

fuser modes 43

loading 87

pages per sheet 69

problem-solving 220, 233

skewed 226

supported sizes 83

wrinkled 227

memory

adding 185

included 2

managing 185 upgrading 185

Memory Enhancement technology

(MEt) 3

Menu button 12

menu map

Information menu 17

printing 152

menus, control panel

Administration 15

Default Job Options 17

Device Behavior 39

E-mail Setup 38

Fax Setup 35

Information 16

Initial Setup 27

locking 170

Management 26

Print Quality 43

Resets 47

Send Setup 38

Service 47

Time/Scheduling 24

mercury-free product 262

messages

default settings 39

e-mail alerts 66

numerical list 195

types of 194

microprocessor speed 3

misfeeds in ADF 177

misformed characters, problem-

solving 226

models, features 2

multifeeds 234

multifunction finisher

capacity 5

ordering 245 staple cartridge, ordering 245

using 8

multiple pages per sheet

Windows 103

N

n-up printing

Windows 103

Netscape Navigator, versions supported

embedded Web server 154

Network Folder, scan to 144

Networking tab, embedded Web

server 157

networks

AppleTalk settings 30

configuring 76

configuring gateway

addresses 136

default gateway 77

diagnostics 30

disabling DLC/LLC 79

disabling protocols 78

ENWW Index 271

DLC/LLC settings 30

HP Web Jetadmin 161

IP address 76

IPX/SPX settings 30

link speed settings 33

Macintosh installation 63, 64

Macintosh settings 66

print servers included 2

protocol configuration page,

printing 34

security 30

SMTP servers 136

subnet mask 77

TCP/IP parameters 76

TCP/IP settings 27

testing SMTP settings 137

troubleshooting printing 237

validating gateway

addresses 236

noise specifications 256

number of copies

default settings 19

O

online help, control panel 14

online support 250

operating environment

specifications 183, 256

operating systems

supported 50, 62

ordering

supplies and accessories 244

supplies through embedded

Web server 157

orientation

setting, Windows 103

output bin

selecting, Windows 104

output quality

copy, improving 232 copy, problem-solving 232

settings 43

P

page order, changing 105

pages per sheet

Windows 103

paper

A4 settings 41

covers, using different

paper 102

curled 227, 233

custom size, selecting 102

custom sizes 85

custom-size, Macintosh

settings 68

default size, selecting 23

first and last pages, using

different paper 102

first page 68

fuser modes 43

pages per sheet 69

problem-solving 220, 233

size, selecting 102

skewed 226

supported sizes 83

type, selecting 102

wrinkled 227

paper path

cleaning 172

pausing a print request 112

PCL drivers

default settings 41

universal 52

PDF error pages 41

Perform Printer Maintenance

message 184

personal jobs 117

personality

default settings 41

phone line, connecting fax

accessory 148

photos

copying 130

loading 139

physical specifications 254

PINs, personal jobs 117

portrait orientation

setting, Windows 103

ports

troubleshooting Macintosh 240

power

troubleshooting 192

power specifications 255

presets (Macintosh) 68

print cartridge

authentication 182

checking toner levels 183

genuine HP 182

life expectancy 183

managing 182 non-HP 182 storing 182

print cartridges

Macintosh status 71

management menu 26

ordering through embedded

Web server 157

recycling 260

warranty 249

print jobs

default settings 23

print media

supported 83

print on both sides

Windows 103

print quality

blurred 229

dropouts 222

environment 220

gray background 223

jams, after 220

light print 221

lines 223

loose toner 224

media 220

misformed characters 226

repeating defects 225

repetitive images 230

scattered lines 229

smeared toner 224

specks 222

tire tracks 228

troubleshooting 220

white lines 228 white spots 228

Print Quality menu, control

panel 43

print server 5

priority, settings 54, 66

private jobs

Windows 104

problem-solving

blurred print 229

copy quality 232

copy size 235

copying 232, 235

curled paper 227

dropouts 222

272 Index ENWW

e-mail alerts 66

environment 220

Error button, control panel

touchscreen 14

gray background 223

light print 221

lines 223, 228

lines, copies 232

media 220, 233

messages, types of 194

networks 30

repeating defects 225

repetitive images 230

scattered lines 229

skewed pages 226

smeared toner 224

specks 222

text quality 226, 229

tire tracks 228 white spots 228

wrinkled paper 227

product status

HP Easy Printer Care 158

proof and hold

Windows 104

proof and hold jobs 116

protocol configuration page,

printing 34

PS emulation driver

default settings 41

PS Emulation drivers 51

PS error pages

default settings 41

Q

quality

copy, improving 232 copy, problem-solving 232

settings 43

Quick Sets 102

R

Ready light

locating 12

real-time clock 171

recipient lists 141

recycling

HP printing supplies returns and environmental

program 260

registration, tray alignment 43

removing Macintosh software 67

repeating defects, problem-

solving 225, 230

replacing

staple cartridges 108

reset button 12

Resets menu, control panel 47

resize documents

Macintosh 68

Windows 103

resolution

settings 43, 65

troubleshooting quality 220

Resolution Enhancement

technology (REt) 43, 65

REt (Resolution Enhancement

technology 43

REt (Resolution Enhancement

technology) 65

retention, job

accessing 116 features 116

personal 117

proof and hold 116

QuickCopy 118

stored 119

right door

locating 7

S

saddle stitching 10

safety statements 264, 265

scale documents

Macintosh 68

Windows 103

scanner calibration 180

scanning

default settings 18

no-wait 40

scanning e-mail validating gateway

addresses 236

scanning to e-mail

about 135, 139

address books 141

configuring 136

default settings 21

sending documents 139

troubleshooting 193

scanning to e-mail

address books 141

control-panel settings 138

job settings 143

LDAP support 136

loading documents 139

recipient lists 141

sending documents 139

SMTP support 136

scanning to folder 144

scanning to workflow 145

Secure Disk Erase 168

security

disk erase 168

Foreign Interface Harness

(FIH) 167

locking control panel

menus 170

settings 30

Send Setup menu 38

Send to Folder 144

Send to Workflow 145

sending to e-mail

about 135, 136, 139

address books 141

default settings 21

sending documents 139

troubleshooting 193

validating gateway

addresses 236

sending to e-mail

address books 141

job settings 143

LDAP support 136

loading documents 139

recipient lists 141

sending documents 139

settings 138

SMTP support 136

separator page

Windows 104

service

HP-Authorized Dealers 250

Service menu, control panel 47

Services tab

Macintosh 71

settings

Default Job Options menu 17

driver presets (Macintosh) 68

ENWW Index 273

drivers 55, 66

priority 54, 66

Settings tab, embedded Web

server 155

shortcuts 102

size, copy

problem-solving 235

size, media

A4 settings 41

default, selecting 23

skewed pages 226

Sleep button 12

Sleep mode

power specifications 255

settings 24, 26

sleep settings

delay 189 sleep time 189 wake time 189 sleep time, setting 25, 189

smeared toner, problem-

solving 224

SMTP servers configuring gateway

address 136 connecting to 136

testing 137

validating gateway

addresses 236

software direct connection installation,

Macintosh 62, 63

embedded Web server 58, 67

HP Easy Printer Care 58, 158

HP Printer Utility 65

HP Web Jetadmin 58

Macintosh 62

network installation,

Macintosh 63, 64

settings 54, 66

supported operating

systems 50, 62

uninstalling Macintosh 67

Windows 49

Solaris software 60

special media

guidelines 86

special paper

guidelines 86

specifications

acoustic 256

electrical 255

media 81

operating

environment 183, 256

physical 254

specks, problem-solving 222, 228

speed dial list, printing 153

spots, problem-solving 222, 228

staple cartridges empty, stop or continue

settings 108 loading 108

staple options

Macintosh 70

Windows 104

stapler

default settings 19

stapler/stacker empty, stop or continue

settings 108 loading staples 108

selecting output location 97

staple jams, clearing 211

stapling 107 stapling 107

Start button 12

Start button, control panel

touchscreen 14

status

embedded Web server 155

Home screen, control panel 13

HP Easy Printer Care 158

HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 65

Macintosh services tab 71

messages, types of 194

Status button 12

Stop button 12

stopping a print request 112

storage, job

accessing 116 features 116

Macintosh settings 65, 71

personal 117

proof and hold 116

QuickCopy 118

settings 26

stored 119

store jobs

Windows 104

stored jobs 119

streaks, problem-solving 232

subnet mask 77

supplies

management menu 26

ordering 244, 245

ordering through embedded

Web server 157

recycling 260

Resets menu 47

status page, printing 152

status, viewing with embedded

Web server 155

status, viewing with HP Printer

Utility 65

supplies, status

HP Easy Printer Care 158

supply-status, Services tab

Macintosh 71

Windows 105

support embedded Web server

links 157

HP Printer Utility pages 65

online 105, 250

supported media 83

system requirements

embedded Web server 154

T

Taiwan EMI statement 265

TCP/IP settings 27

technical support

online 250

temperature

requirements 183

temperature specifications 256

tests

networks 30

text, problem-solving

blurred 229

blurry 232

dropouts 222

misformed characters 226

time zone 24

time, setting 24, 171

Time/Scheduling menu, control

panel 24

274 Index ENWW

timeout settings 27, 39

tire tracks, problem-solving 228

toner adhesion problems,

solving 233

density setting 65

Economode 43

loose, problem-solving 224 smeared, problem-solving 224

transfer unit warranty 249

tray 1

capacity 4

fuser levers 114, 115

jam locations 196

jams, clearing 199

loading envelopes 113

loading paper 87

locating 7

tray 2

jams, clearing 199

tray 2 or 3

capacity 4

custom media, loading 92

jam locations 196

jams, clearing 200

loading detectable standard-

size paper 88

loading undetectable standard-

size paper 90

locating 7

tray 3

jams, clearing 199

tray 4

capacity 4

jams, clearing 201

locating 7

trays

capacities 4

configure 94

default settings 40

double-sided printing 70

feeding problems, solving 234

included 2

jams, clearing 199

Macintosh settings 65

registration, setting 43

trays, status

HP Easy Printer Care 158

troubleshooting

checklist 192

control panel 193

control panel messages,

numerical 195

digital sending 193

duplexing 219

EPS files 240

gateway addresses 236

jams 196, 215

Macintosh problems 239

media handling problems 216

network printing 237

output quality 220

transparencies 218

TrueType fonts included 4

two-sided copying

default settings 18

two-sided printing blank pages, default

settings 40

default settings 23

Macintosh settings 65

Windows 103

U

uninstalling Macintosh software 67

universal print driver 52

UNIX software 60

usage page, printing 152

USB configuration 74

USB port

Macintosh installation 62, 63

troubleshooting Macintosh 240

V

validating gateway addresses 236

vertical transfer door

locating 7

vertical white or faded stripes 232

voltage specifications 255

voltage, troubleshooting 193

W

wake time, setting 25, 189

Warning button, control panel

touchscreen 14

warranty

Customer self repair 248

print cartridge 249

product 247

transfer unit and fuser 249

watermarks

Windows 103

wavy paper, problem-solving 227

Web browser requirements

embedded Web server 154

Web sites

customer support 250

firmware updates 6

HP Web Jetadmin,

downloading 161

Macintosh customer

support 251

Material Safety Data Sheet

(MSDS) 263

ordering supplies 244

universal print driver 52

white lines or spots, problem-

solving 228

white or faded stripes 232

Windows

driver settings 55

drivers supported 51

supported operating

systems 50

universal print driver 52

Windows 2000 fax 150

workflow, send to 145

wrinkled paper, problem-

solving 227

ENWW Index 275

276 Index ENWW

© 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

www.hp.com

*CC395-90926*

*CC395-90926*

CC395-90926

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents